JP6810473B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is provided when a game area in which a game ball can flow down is provided, a game is executed based on a winning of the game ball to a starting winning opening provided in the game area, and the result of the game becomes a special result. , Regarding a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area based on the fact that the game ball wins a prize at the start port provided in the game area (starting prize). ) Is variablely displayed. If a variable display game is started and a plurality of identification information modes stopped after a predetermined time is a predetermined special result mode, a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Some are in a gaming state. In such a game machine, there is also known one provided with a normal variable winning device that changes the ease of winning a prize at the starting port by changing the operation mode of the movable member (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-121302

However, the opportunity to change the operating state of the movable member is common, such as at the end of the special gaming state, and does not contribute to the improvement of the interest. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
The game is provided with a game area in which the game ball can flow down, and the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the player is notified. In a game machine that generates an advantageous state
A game control means that comprehensively controls the game,
With the ordinary variable winning device which has the starting winning opening and can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and can generate the execution right of the game by winning. ,
A second starting winning opening forming the starting winning opening, which is located on the downstream side of the ordinary variable winning device and at a position where a game ball that has passed through a path that can win the ordinary variable winning device can win a prize. Prepare,
The game control means
The first game is executed as the game based on the winning of the game ball to the ordinary variable winning device,
The second game is executed as the game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening.
The first game and the second game can be executed at the same time.
The special result is
A first special result in which the first game and the second game have the same derivation probability, and the derivation probability is set to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state. ,
A second special result, which has the same derivation probability in both the low probability state and the high probability state and can be derived in the second game, is included.
The game control means
The operating state of the normal variable winning device is controlled by either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state.
When the operating state of the normal variable winning device is the second operating state, it is possible to change to the first operating state based on the start of the first game that results in the first special result.
If the result of the second game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first game and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is executed, the first is being executed during the execution of the special gaming state. Configured to interrupt the game,
Change to the first operating state as the fluctuation time for the first game, which is the first special result in which the operating state of the normal variable winning device is changed from the second operating state to the first operating state. It is a feature that a fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the first game can be set without the above .

According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the ordinary variable winning apparatus. It is a front view of the special variable winning device. It is a top view of the special variable winning device. It is a figure explaining the operation of the opening / closing member, and is (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure explaining the rolling mode of a game ball in a special variable winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the change of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the change of a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect on a display device. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the operation of a normal variable winning apparatus and various time. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of a variation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of a variation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special variable winning device. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 3 switch processing. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining support management process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the 4th specific game state setting process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing transition setting processing 2 during display. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during display. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during display. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during display. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during display. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hit fanfare. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual sphere processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a small hit end process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining the variable command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot system command processing. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern in 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect in the display device in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect in the display device in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the effect in the display device in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern in 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the execution mode of the effect in 3rd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution mode and selection ratio of the effect in 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the production in 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the production in 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution mode and selection ratio of the effect in 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the production in 4th modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the production in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the special figure variation display game in 6th modification.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 80. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. For example, a character or a character that produces a plurality of identification information (special symbols) or a special figure variation display game. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the first starting winning opening 36. In addition, a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided on the upper part of the center case 40. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 19) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 19) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a first start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). .. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 19). Further, in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40, a second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. Has been played. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 19).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 is provided between the normal drawing starting gate 34 and the second starting winning opening 97. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately executed by winning the winning opening (Public electric winning opening 37d) of the normal variable winning device 37, or the special drawing 1 start winning memory (first starting memory). ) Is stored. That is, in the present embodiment, the winning opening (Public winning opening 37d) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the first starting winning area that gives the start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). is there. Then, the game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 19), and when the game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a, the game control device 100 sets the game control device 100. Execute the special figure 1 variable display game immediately, or memorize the special figure 1 start winning memory. As described above, in the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d and the first starting winning opening 36 correspond to the first starting winning area (starting opening in FIG. 1), and the second starting winning opening 97 is the second starting. It corresponds to the winning area (starting port of special figure 2).

The game control device (game control means) 100 controls the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 to be converted into an open state and a closed state based on a predetermined lottery result of the normal variation display game. (Conversion control means) is connected (see FIG. 19). The details of the configuration of the normal variable winning device 37 will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 moves back and forth (slides) by the normal variable winning device 37c to move the normal variable winning device 37 in the front-rear direction. It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the mouth 37d (makes the game ball flow into the solenoid winning opening 37d). As the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that opens the ordinary electric winning opening 37d by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the normal electric solenoid 37c is provided. You may. The game control device 100 can open the movable member 37b via the normal electric solenoid 37c and allow the game ball to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. Change to an open state.

Further, the game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual. A time saving state (general power support (electric support) state) is generated by lengthening the generation time of the winning easy state than the winning easy state generated in the game state.

A special variable winning device 38 is provided in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. As shown in FIGS. 15 to 18, the special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving the opening / closing member 990 back and forth (sliding) in the front-rear direction. The special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening 38d from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening 38d. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 19).

That is, the special variable winning device 38 of the present embodiment opens and closes from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) in which the opening / closing member 990 closes the large winning opening 38d depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The member 990 retracts and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be accepted. Then, the game ball arriving at the special variable winning device 38 is repeatedly guided diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992, and diagonally forward by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964. It meanders back and forth and flows down from right to left. As a result, the time for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 is longer than in the case where the flow-down path 38f has no undulations such as a front wall protrusion 954, a rear wall protrusion 964, a protrusion 992, and a recess 993 and flows down linearly. become longer. Therefore, the game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, the game ball existing on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. There is a high possibility that the player will fall and win the big prize opening 38d, and even with a short opening, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning.

Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 is bounced by contacting the protruding portion 992 and guided in a direction away from the large winning opening 38d. Further, the bounced game ball may be further separated from the grand prize opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the protrusions 992 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, the protrusions 992 may fall without contacting the protrusions 992 through these intervals. By providing the projecting portion 992, the front wall projecting portion 954, and the rear wall projecting portion 964 in this way, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can. Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and the ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented. The configuration in which the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37, which will be described later, may be used as the configuration in which the game ball in the special variable winning device 38 is retained, or conversely, the game ball in the special variable winning device 38 may be retained. The configuration for retaining the game ball may be used as the configuration for retaining the game ball in the ordinary variable winning device 37.

Returning to FIG. 2, the game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like. Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure fluctuation display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 variable display for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for a game and a storage display unit 53 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variation display game composed of LED lamps are provided.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning device 38), and a method of hitting that is advantageous to the player among left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for notifying (a method of hitting corresponding to the game state) and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.

Further, a normal map display unit 58 for displaying the normal map fluctuation display game, a storage display unit 59 for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state. A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven. It is configured so that it is displayed that it is changing, and it is possible to distinguish between special figure 1 and special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode of the hit is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The storage display unit 53 is the number of undigested balls among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, which are the fluctuation start conditions of the special figure 1 display 51 (starting memory number = pending number). Is displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) multiple LEDs. The round display unit 55 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn it on. The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

In the case where the first game status display unit 56 is set to proceed with the game by hitting left, for example, all the LEDs are turned off and the game is hit by hitting right. When the state is set to proceed (when hitting to the right), all the LEDs are turned on. The probability display unit 57 turns off all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and all LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state). Turn on.

FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 30 included in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 constitutes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped game board main body 80, a front component 600 constituting a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40, and also plays a game. A rear component 700 to which various members necessary for the board 30 are attached is provided. The rear component 700 has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having a recess opened in the front, and inside the recess, a board effect device 44 for producing a game by operating is formed. , Various movable accessory units are provided.

The front component 600 is provided with a general winning opening 35, a warp flow path forming member 614, a stage portion 620, and the like. In addition to the front component 600, the game board main body 80 includes a general drawing start gate 34, a general winning opening 35, a first starting winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 97, a normal variable winning device 37, and a special variable. A winning device 38, a batch display device 50, and the like are provided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, a flow path 615 whose front side is covered with a transparent cover and communicates vertically is formed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is won. The game ball that fails (specifically, the game ball that has arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 but has not won the normal variable winning device 37) flows down through the flow path 615. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an inclined surface whose upper surface 617 descends to the left, and a game ball flowing downward on the flow path 615 is received by the upper surface 617, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 exist. It is designed to guide you to the left.

[Normal variable winning device]
Next, an example of the configuration of the ordinary variable winning device 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 12. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, FIG. 5A is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and FIG. 5B is a top view of the normal variable winning device 37 in which the movable member 37b is in the open state. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 5, the ordinary variable winning device 37 has a flow path rear wall 373a arranged along the front surface of the game board main body 80 and a flow path front wall 371a arranged in front of the flow path rear wall 373a. It is provided with a flow path 37f in which game balls can flow down in a row. The flow path 37f is inclined so as to descend to the right when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a row toward the right. Further, the ordinary variable winning device 37 allows the game balls to pass in a row inside the ordinary variable winning device 37 (specifically, the inside of the base portion composed of the front base member 373 and the rear base member 375). It is provided with a substantially U-shaped detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 4, the inlet 37g1 (one end of the detour 37g) and the exit 37g2 (the other end of the detour 37g) of the detour 37g are formed on the rear wall 373a of the flow path, and the game ball. Will flow in from the flow-down road 37f to the detour 37g one by one through the inlet 37g1, and flow out from the detour 37g to the flow-down road 37f one by one through the outlet 37g2.

As shown in FIG. 4, the flow path front wall 371a has a protrusion 371b that projects rearward and penetrates the flow path rear wall 373a. The protrusion 371b is a position where the game balls flowing down the flow path 37f collide, and is arranged at a position between the inlet 37g1 and the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g. Therefore, the protruding portion 371b blocks the flow of the game ball in the flow path 37f on the way (that is, before flowing into the end point (downstream end) of the flow path 37f), thereby causing the game ball to detour 37g. It is designed to guide you. Since the protrusion 371b is provided in the middle of the flow path 37f, the game ball cannot flow into the end point of the flow path 37f unless it passes through the detour 37g.

As shown in FIG. 5, the bottom surface of the central portion and the right end portion of the flow path 37f and the bottom surface of the detour 37g are formed by a movable member 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the movable member 37b is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize in the normally variable winning device 37 (Public electric winning opening 37d) by projecting forward, and FIG. 5 (b) shows. As described above, it can be converted into an open state in which a game ball can win a prize in the general electric winning opening 37d by evacuating to the rear. That is, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b and cannot flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, and the movable member 37b is in the open state. If this is the case, it is possible to flow into the Fuden winning opening 37d.

Specifically, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f rolls on the upper surface of the movable member 37b when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. That is, it flows down the flow path 37f to the protruding portion 371b, collides with the protruding portion 371b, and flows into the detour 37g. Further, when the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable member 37b collides with the protrusion 371b, or when the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f flows into the upper surface of the movable member 37b. If the movable member 37b is in the open state at that time, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the flow path 37f flows into the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the open state. On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the detour 37g and has flowed into the end point of the flow path 37f does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, but is normally variable winning device 37. It advances to the outside and flows down to the guidance unit 616 through, for example, the flow down path 615. That is, the game ball corresponds to a game ball that failed to win the ordinary variable winning device 37 (a game ball that did not win the ordinary variable winning device 37 even though it arrived at the ordinary variable winning device 37). .. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, there is a gap between the movable member 37b and the flow path front wall 371a, but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 4, the ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a start port 2 switch 37a and a movable member unit 374 having a movable member 37b and a universal solenoid 37c. Further, the normal variable winning device 37 includes a front decorative member 371 having a flow path front wall 371a, a front base member 373 having a flow path rear wall 373a, a rear base member 375 to which a movable member 37b and the like are attached, and a rear base. A rear cover member 377 that covers the rear surface of the member 375, a front substrate holder 372 for fixing the front LED substrate 372a and the front LED substrate 372a to the rear surface of the front decorative member 371, a rear LED substrate 376a, and the rear LED substrate 376a. Is provided with a rear substrate holder 376 for fixing the rear base member 375 to the rear surface.

At least the front decorative member 371, the front base member 373, and the rear base member 375 are made of a material capable of transmitting light. A front LED substrate 372a is arranged behind the front decorative member 371 as a decorative means, and a rear LED substrate 376a is arranged behind the rear base member 375 as a decorative means. It is possible to decorate.

The front decorative member 371 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 371c. The front surface of the front surface portion 371c is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 371c is a surface visible to the player and is decorated. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 371c is a flow path front wall 371a forming a side wall on the front side of the flow path 37f.

As shown in FIG. 5, on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) upstream side front wall protrusions 371d that project rearward are provided. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces. The upstream front wall protrusion 371d has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f forms a contact portion that can be contacted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a downstream front wall protrusion 371e projecting rearward is provided on the rear surface side of the flow path front wall 371a. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces. The downstream front wall protrusion 371e has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing into the end point of the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f forms a contact portion that can be contacted. Further, in the downstream front wall protrusion 371e, a game ball flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 (outside the normal variable winning device 37) flows downstream into the normal variable winning device 37 (downstream path 37f). It has a function to prevent intrusion from the end point side).

FIG. 6A is a back view of the front decorative member 371. As shown in FIG. 6A, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 371f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front portion 371c are provided on the rear surface side of the front decorative member 371. The function of the extending wall 371f is different depending on the location where the extending wall 371f is provided, and the bottom surface portion 371f1 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the start point (upstream end) of the flow path 37f). General electric winning opening forming part 371f2 forming the side wall or bottom of the general electric winning opening 37d, guiding flow path forming part 371f3 forming the guiding flow path 37e for guiding the game ball winning in the general electric winning opening 37d, starting port 2 switch It has a function as a switch mounting portion forming portion 371f4 forming a mounting portion for mounting the 37a, and a peripheral wall 371f5 for preventing the intrusion of the game ball flowing down around the normal variable winning device 37 into the inside.

The bottom surface portion 371f1 forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f is an inclined surface inclined to the left side when viewed from the rear surface side. The general electric winning opening forming portion 371f2 is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the general electric winning opening 37d into the induction flow path 37e. Game balls can flow into the guidance flow path 37e in a row, and a start port 2 switch 37a is provided at the inflow portion into the guidance flow path 37e. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the general electric winning opening 37d will flow into the induction flow path 37e after being detected by the start port 2 switch 37a. The guidance flow path 37e formed by the guidance flow path forming portion 371f3 is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the general electric winning opening 37d to the rear surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is placed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 371c. 371 g of ribs for guiding backward are formed.

The front LED substrate 372a and the front substrate holder 372 are arranged inside the peripheral wall 371f5 of the rear surface of the front decorative member 371 (a portion surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5). Further, a portion of the rear surface of the front decorative member 371 surrounded by the peripheral wall 371f5 is subjected to processing for scattering light (concavo-convex processing in the example shown in FIG. 6A). This makes it possible to effectively decorate the normally variable winning device 37 with the light from the front LED board 372a and the rear LED board 376a, and also front the front LED board 372a itself and the front board holder 372. It is difficult to see through the front decorative member 371 from the front of the member 371. Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (b), there are a plurality of holes for releasing heat such as the front LED substrate 372a in the lower part of the front base member 373 (7 in the example shown in FIG. 6 (b)). It is provided. These holes are also made difficult to see from the front of the front decorative member 371 due to the processing applied to the front decorative member 371 to scatter the light.

As shown in FIG. 4, the front base member 373 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b. A front decorative member 371 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 373b that is not hidden by the front decorative member 371 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 373b is a flow path rear wall 373a forming a side wall on the rear side of the flow path 37f. Further, at a position at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 373a, a movable member insertion portion 373c penetrating the front and rear for inserting the movable member 37b from the rear surface side of the front base member 373 is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) rear wall protrusions 373d projecting forward are provided on the front surface side of the front base member 373. The rear wall protrusion 373d is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and the upstream front wall is behind each of the upstream front wall protrusions 371d provided on the flow path front wall 371a. It is provided so as to be located slightly downstream of the protrusion 371d. The rear wall protrusion 373d has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f forms a contact portion that can be contacted.

FIG. 6B is a back view of the front base member 373. As shown in FIG. 6B, the guide flow path 37e is located on the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b at the central portion of the rear surface portion 373b and facing the portion of the front decorative member 371 where the guide flow path 37e is formed. A penetrating portion 373e penetrating back and forth is formed so as to communicate with the side. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 373f extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 373b are provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The function of the extending wall 373f is different depending on the place where the wall is provided, and functions as a guide flow path forming portion 373f1 forming the guide flow path 37e and a peripheral wall 373f2 forming the periphery of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Have.

The guide flow path forming portion 373f1 forms the guide flow path 37e so as to guide the game ball flowing into the penetration portion 373e backward. Further, a rib 373g for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the lower end portion of the guidance flow path forming portion 373f1. The lower end of the guide flow path forming portion 373f1 and the rib 373g formed on the lower end portion are inclined surfaces whose upper surfaces are lowered rearward, and the game balls flowing into the penetrating portion 373e are received by these upper surfaces and rearward. It is designed to guide you to. The guided game ball flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the game ball to the outside of the game machine 10.

The peripheral wall 373f2 is formed to match the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates back and forth formed in the portion of the game board main body 80 to which the normal variable winning device 37 is attached, and the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. At that time, the peripheral wall 373f2 is in a state of being inserted through the penetrating portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 373b located outside the peripheral wall 373f2 is in contact with the front surface of the game board main body 80 when the normal variable winning device 37 is attached to the game board main body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 4, the rear base member 375 includes a peripheral wall 375a that coincides with the peripheral wall 373f2 of the front base member 373 in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a pair of the rear base member 375 that guides and supports the movable member 37b that operates in the front-rear direction at a position facing the movable member insertion portion 373c formed in the front base member 373. The movable member holding portion 375b of the above is provided. The pair of movable member holding portions 375b are arranged at a predetermined interval (gap 375c) so that they can come into contact with the lower surface of the movable member 37b and can guide and support the movable member 37b. It is provided so as to extend along the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 4, a movable member unit 374 including a movable member 37b and an operating mechanism (driving mechanism) for operating the movable member 37b is attached to the front surface side of the rear base member 375. The movable member unit 374 includes a movable member 37b that can slide in the front-rear direction, a normal solenoid 37c for operating the movable member 37b, and a slider 374a that transmits a driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. And a crank 374b.

The movable member unit 374 has a closed state in which the movable member 37b is projected forward as shown in FIG. 5 (a) and an open state in which the movable member 37b is retracted rearward as shown in FIG. 5 (b). It is convertible. The movable member 37b can appear above the general electric winning opening 37d via the movable member holding portion 375b formed on the rear base member 375 and the movable member insertion portion 373c formed on the front base member 373. There is.

FIG. 7A is an exploded perspective view of the movable member unit 374, and FIG. 7B is a front view of the movable member unit 37b. 8 (a) is a top view of the movable member 37b, and FIG. 8 (b) is a bottom view of the movable member 37b. As shown in FIG. 7A, the movable member 37b is located at a position lower than the upper portion 37b1, the first middle stage portion 37b2 provided at a position lower than the upper stage portion 37b1, and the first middle stage portion 37b2. The second middle stage portion 37b3 provided and the lower stage portion 37b4 provided at a position lower than the second middle stage portion 37b3 form a stepped shape arranged in the left-right direction. The upper part 37b1, the first middle part 37b2, the second middle part 37b3, and the lower part 37b4 are arranged in this order so that the upper part 37b1 is arranged on the leftmost side and the lower part 37b4 is arranged on the rightmost side. The ball is designed to flow down from left to right.

The upper end portion 37b1 has a front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and is a flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f. The flow path forming portion of the upper portion 37b1 is one step lower than the portion of the upper portion 37b1 other than the flow path forming portion. Further, the lower wall protruding portion 37b5 extends forward from the right end portion of the upper stage portion 37b1 other than the flow path forming portion. The lower wall protruding portion 37b5 has a slope on the left side surface, and is provided so as to gradually narrow the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the flow path forming portion. The lower wall protrusion 37b5 has a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the right forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f and suppress the ball power. That is, the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f forms a contact portion that can be contacted.

In the first middle stage portion 37b2, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state is a flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 37f, and the front end thereof. A portion other than the portion (that is, a portion other than the flow path forming portion) is regarded as a detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the first middle stage portion 37b2, the boundary portion between the flow path forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The first middle stage portion 37b2 is inclined so that the rear end is located below the front end. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the game ball is likely to roll from the front side to the rear side in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. Further, on the upper surface of the first middle stage portion 37b2, a meandering left ridge portion 37b6 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth is formed. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the detour 37g can be meandered to suppress the ball power.

The second middle stage portion 37b3 is a protruding portion 371b in which the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d guides the game ball flowing down the flow path 37f to the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. It is placed directly under.

In the lower portion 37b4, the front end portion extending upward of the general electric winning opening 37d when the movable member 37b is in the closed state forms the bottom surface of the flow path 37f (specifically, the bottom surface of the end point of the flow path 37f). The flow path forming portion is formed, and the portion other than the front end portion (that is, the portion other than the flow path forming portion) is the detour forming portion forming the bottom surface of the detour 37g. Of the lower portion 37b4, the boundary portion between the flow path forming portion and the detour forming portion is arranged directly below the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state.

The lower end portion 37b4 is inclined so that the rear end portion is located above the front end portion, and the rear end portion is flush with the rear end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the game ball is likely to roll from the rear side to the front side in the downstream portion of the detour 37g. The rear end portion of the lower portion 37b4 may be provided at a position lower than the rear end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2. Further, on the upper surface of the lower portion 37b4, a meandering right ridge portion 37b7 that protrudes upward and extends back and forth is formed. As a result, the game ball that rolls on the detour 37g can be meandered to suppress the ball power.

As described above, the movable member 37b is provided with a rising portion such as a lower wall protrusion 37b5, a left protrusion 37b6, and a right protrusion 37b7. Further, the front decorative member 371 is provided with a rising portion such as the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the front base member 373 is provided with a rising portion such as the rear wall protrusion 373d. .. With such a rising portion, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, a sliding portion 37b8 extending downward is formed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the movable member 37b. The sliding portion 37b8 is formed so as to extend along the front-rear direction, and the movable member 37b is placed on the holding portion 373h by contacting the upper surface of the pair of holding portions 373h formed on the front base member 373. It becomes slidable.

As shown in FIGS. 7 (b) and 8 (b), a connecting pin 37b9 projecting downward is provided in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b. Further, as shown in FIG. 7A, a through portion 374b1 through which the connection pin 37b9 can be inserted is formed in the crank (drive arm) 374b that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b. The movable member 37b and the crank 374b are connected by inserting the tip end portion (lower end portion) of the connection pin 37b9 into the penetration portion 374b1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 7 (b) and 8 (b), in the central portion of the lower surface of the movable member 37b, the front side and the rear side of the connection pin 37b9 project downward and extend along the front-rear direction. A guide rib 37b10 is provided. The guide ribs 37b10 include a gap 373i (see FIG. 6B) formed along the front-rear direction between the pair of holding portions 373h of the front base member 373, and a pair of movable members of the rear base member 375. It can be inserted into the gap 375c (see FIG. 4) formed along the front-rear direction between the holding portions 375b. By inserting the guide ribs 37b10 of the movable member 37b into these gaps 373i and 375c from above, it is possible to guide the linear movement (slide movement) of the movable member 37b in the front-rear direction. That is, by fitting the guide rib 37b10 of the movable member 37b into the gap 373i of the front base member 373 and the gap 375c of the rear base member 375, the movement of the movable member 37b in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the movable member 37b moves. Can be limited to movement in the front-back direction.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the crank 374b that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is a substantially L-shaped member, and the connecting pin 37b9 of the movable member 37b is attached to one end thereof. A penetrating portion 374b1 that can be inserted is formed, and a convex portion 374b2 is formed at the other end portion. Further, the slider 374a that transmits the driving force from the normal electric solenoid 37c to the movable member 37b is formed with a recess 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted, and the convex portion 374b2 is inserted into the concave portion 374a1. The slider 374a and the crank 374b are connected with each other. Further, a rotation shaft 374b3 along the vertical direction is formed at the bent portion of the crank 374b, and the crank 374b can rotate around the rotation shaft 374b3. The rotation shaft 374b3 is sandwiched from above and below by the rear base member 375 and is rotatably held.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the slider 374a includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 374a2 orthogonal to the vertical direction, a left wall portion 374a3 connected to the left end of the main body portion 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a main body portion. It is configured to include a front wall portion 374a4 connected to the front end of the 374a2 and orthogonal to the main body portion 374a2, and a protruding piece 374a5 projecting forward from the front wall portion 374a4. The concave portion 374a1 through which the convex portion 374b2 of the crank 374b can be inserted is formed in the main body portion 374a2.

The left wall portion 374a3 of the slider 374a is engaged with the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal electric solenoid 37c, and the drive shaft 37c1 of the slider 374a is extended (in the case of this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the right). Then, it is pushed by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the right, and when the drive shaft 37c1 retracts (in the case of this embodiment, the tip of the drive shaft 37c1 moves to the left), it is pulled by the drive shaft 37c1 and moves to the left. To do.

As shown in FIG. 6B, a recessed portion 373j extending in the left-right direction is provided on the rear surface side of the front base member 373. The protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a can be inserted into the recessed portion 373j, and the protruding piece 374a5 is inserted into the recessed portion 373j from the rear to guide the linear movement (sliding movement) of the slider 374a in the left-right direction. be able to. Further, the front wall portion 374a4 of the slider 374a comes into contact with the rear surface of the front base member 373 when the protruding piece 374a5 of the slider 374a is inserted into the recessed portion 373j of the front base member 373 from the rear. As a result, the front-rear position of the slider 374a with respect to the front base member 373 is set to a predetermined front-rear position.

When the movable member 37b is converted from the open state to the closed state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal solenoid solenoid 37c is extended. When the drive shaft 37c1 is extended, the slider 374a slides to the right and the crank 374b rotates counterclockwise with respect to the rotation shaft 374b3 when viewed from the upper surface side, so that the connection pin 983a faces forward. The movable member 37b projects forward. As a result, the movable member 37b is closed (the state shown in FIG. 5A), and the game ball cannot be won in the general electric winning opening 37d.

On the other hand, when the movable member 37b is converted from the closed state to the open state, the drive shaft 37c1 of the normal electric solenoid 37c is retracted. When the drive shaft 37c1 retracts, the slider 374a slides to the left and the crank 374b rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 374b3 when viewed from the upper surface side so that the connection pin 37b9 faces backward. Moving and moving member 37
b evacuates backward. As a result, the movable member 37b is in the open state (the state shown in FIG. 5B), and the game ball can be won in the general electric winning opening 37d.

9 to 12 show the rolling mode of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. Note that in FIGS. 9 to 12, some members are not shown for the sake of explanation. The game ball arriving at the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball that has flowed into the starting point of the flow path 37f) is first guided diagonally to the rear side by the upstream side front wall protrusion 371d located on the upstream side, and then on the upstream side. It is guided diagonally to the front side by the rear wall protrusion 373d located at, and flows into the front end portion of the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b.

The game ball that has flowed into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b is guided diagonally to the rear side by the upstream side front wall protrusion 371d located on the downstream side, and then the rear wall protrusion 373d and the movable member 37b located on the downstream side. It is guided diagonally forward by the lower wall protrusion 37b5 and flows into the front end portion of the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b. That is, the game ball meanders back and forth and flows down the flow path 37f. As a result, the game ball stays on the movable member 37b as compared with the case where the flow path 37f has no starting parts such as the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, and the rear wall protrusion 373d and flows down linearly. The time will be longer.

The game ball that has flowed into the first middle stage portion 37b2 of the movable member 37b collides with the protruding portion 371b and is guided to the rear side by the protruding portion 371b and the first middle stage portion 37b2 that is inclined backward. As shown in (a), it flows into the detour 37g from the inlet 37g1 of the detour 37g. As shown in FIG. 10, inside the rear base member 375, a first guide piece 375d for guiding a game ball rolling around a detour 37g from the first middle stage portion 37b2 to the lower stage portion 37b4, and a lower stage portion 37b4. A second guide piece 375e that guides the upper side from the rear side to the front side is provided. When the game ball rolls on the first middle stage portion 37b2 and flows into the rear base member 375 as shown in FIG. 10, it is guided to the right by the first guide piece 375d as shown in FIG. 11 and is guided to the lower stage. It flows into the portion 37b4.

As shown in FIG. 12, the game ball that has flowed into the lower portion 37b4 of the movable member 37b is guided forward by the second guide piece 375e and the lower portion 37b4 that is inclined forward, and is shown in FIG. 9B. As such, it flows from the outlet 37g2 of the detour 37g to the end point of the flow path 37f (the front end portion of the lower stage portion 37b4). Here, since the meandering left ridge portion 37b6 is formed in the first middle stage portion 37b2, the game ball meanders left and right and rolls the upstream portion of the detour 37g to the rear side. Further, since the lower portion 37b4 is formed with a meandering right ridge portion 37b7, the game ball meanders left and right and rolls forward in the downstream portion of the detour 37g.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the front base member 373 is provided with a partition wall 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g, and is upstream of the detour 37g among the rear end portions of the partition wall 373k. An intermediate protrusion 373k1 is formed in a portion corresponding to the portion. Therefore, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces while rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle stage portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, and is once pushed back to the entrance 37g1 side. Is done. As a result, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than in the case where the detour 37g has no starting parts such as the left protrusion 37b6, the right protrusion 37b7, and the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and rolls linearly. become longer.

As described above, the flow path 37f is provided with the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the upstream front wall protrusion 371d, the rear wall protrusion 373d, and the like, and the detour 37g is provided with the left protrusion 37b6 and the left protrusion 37b6. Since the rising portion such as the right protrusion portion 37b7 and the intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 is provided, the time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b becomes long. Further, by providing these starting parts, the rolling mode of the game ball rolling on the movable member 37b becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by providing these starting parts, when the movable member 37b is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the movable member 37b into the normal electric winning opening 37d can be shifted, and the general electric power can be provided. It is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring in the winning opening 37d.

The game ball arriving at the normal variable winning device 37 flows down the flow path 37f and first flows into the upper portion 37b1 of the movable member 37b. When the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, when the game ball flows into the upper portion 37b1, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball flows down the flow path 37f and heads toward the protrusion 371b. If the movable member 37b is opened before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d without passing through the detour 37g. On the other hand, if the movable member 37b is not opened before the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b, the game ball collides with the protrusion 371b and heads for the detour 37g.

Even if the movable member 37b is opened while the game ball is rolling the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is opened while the game ball is rolling the detour 37g. Even if not, the game ball continues to roll on the detour 37g toward the exit 37g2. Then, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game ball flows into the general electric winning opening 37d. On the other hand, when the game ball comes out from the exit 37g2 of the detour 37g, if the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball does not flow into the general electric winning opening 37d, and the normal variable winning device 37 It becomes a game ball that has advanced to the outside (game area 32) and failed to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37.

Here, the intermediate protrusion 373k1 (see FIG. 6B) formed on the partition wall 373k of the front base member 373 has a function of meandering the game ball to prolong the residence time of the game ball on the movable member 37b. Not only that, it also has a function of ensuring a sufficient residence time even when the movable member 37b operates (moves back and forth) while the game ball is rolling around the detour 37g. For example, if the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the game ball is rolling in the downstream portion (that is, above the lower portion 37b4) of the detour 37g, the game ball is with the movable member 37b. The game ball is rolling in the downstream part of the detour 37g because it is pulled back to the rear side (upstream side) in the downstream part of the detour 37g due to frictional resistance or contact with the right ridge 37b7 or the like. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is longer than when the movable member 37b does not change its state during the process.

On the other hand, for example, when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the game ball is rolling on the upstream portion (that is, on the first middle stage portion 37b2) of the detour 37g, the game ball is movable. Due to frictional resistance with the member 37b, contact with the left protrusion 37b6, etc., the game ball is pulled to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream part of the detour 37g, so that the game ball rolls the upstream part of the detour 37g. The residence time for the game ball to stay on the movable member 37b is shorter than that when the movable member 37b does not change its state during the movement. On the other hand, since the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment is provided with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, the game ball moves to the rear side (downstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g. When it is pulled in, it collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 and bounces. That is, the game ball collides with the intermediate protrusion 373k1 while being drawn to the downstream side, and is once pushed back to the front side (upstream side) in the upstream portion of the detour 37g, so that the game ball is upstream of the detour 37g. Even when the movable member 37b is converted to the open state while the portion is being rolled, a sufficient residence time on the movable member 37b of the game ball can be secured.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a game board main body 80 in which a game area 32 in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, and a variable winning device provided in the game area 32 (the present embodiment). In the case of, the game machine is provided with a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80 and a game area. An opening / closing member (movable) that can be converted into a winning area (in the case of this embodiment, the Fuden winning opening 37d) in which a game ball flowing down 32 can be won, a closed state in which the winning area is closed, and an open state in which the winning area is opened. Member 37b), a flow path (flow path 37f) through which the game ball can roll, a retention area (detour 37g) for retaining the game ball, and a game ball rolling (flowing down) in the flow path. It is provided with a guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides the region. Then, the flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the opening / closing member in the closed state, and when the opening / closing member is in the open state, the flow path is formed when the opening / closing member is in the closed state. The game ball is configured to win a prize in the winning area through the space, and the staying area is formed on the rear surface side of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the opening / closing member, and has a plurality of communication ports communicating with the flow path. , The game ball that has been guided by the guidance unit and has flowed in from the flow path through the communication port (entrance 37g1) of the plurality of communication ports is combined with the one communication port of the plurality of communication ports. Is configured to be able to flow out to the flow path through different communication ports (exit 37g2).

Specifically, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a game board main body 80 in which a game area 32 on which a game ball can flow down is formed, and a variable winning device provided in the game area 32 (the present embodiment). In the case of, the game machine is provided with a normal variable winning device 37), and the variable winning device includes a mounting wall portion (rear surface portion 373b) for mounting the variable winning device on the game board main body 80 and a game area. The winning area (Public winning opening 37d) where the game ball flowing down 32 can win, and the closed state where the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the winning area by sliding back and forth, and the game ball in the winning area. A slide member (movable member 37b) that can be converted into an open state in which a game ball can be won, a first flow path (flow path 37f) and a second flow path (detour 37g) in which a game ball can roll, and a first It is provided with an guiding portion (protruding portion 371b) that guides a game ball that rolls (flows down) in the flow path to the second flow path. Then, the first flow path is formed on the front side of the mounting wall portion by the slide member when the slide member is in the closed state, and when the slide member is in the open state, the slide member is in the closed state. In a certain case, the game ball is configured to win a prize in the winning area through the space in which the first flow path is formed, and the second flow path is formed by the slide member of the mounting wall portion regardless of the state of the slide member. It is a communication port formed on the rear surface side and having both ends communicating with the first flow path, and has been guided by an induction portion and has flowed in from the first flow path through one of the communication ports (inlet 37g1) at both ends. The game ball is configured to be able to flow out to the first flow path through the other communication port (outlet 37g2) at both ends.

That is, the ordinary variation winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a detour 37g (retention region, second flow path) is added to the flow path 37f (flow path, first flow path). By adding the detour 37g in this way, the residence time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the movable member 37b (opening / closing member, slide member) becomes longer than when the detour 37g is not provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the game ball to win a prize in the winning opening (in the case of the present embodiment, the general electric winning opening 37d), and the decrease of the game ball in the predetermined gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, the time saving state) is suppressed. Because it becomes possible, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the normal variable winning device 37 having the game ball retention function is arranged in the right game area (the area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32), the player can play the game ball in the right game area. You can enjoy the rolling mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the front decorative member 371 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, and the rolling mode of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is sufficiently visible. Therefore, in the right gaming area. You can enjoy the rolling mode of the game ball more.

The variable winning device provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the ordinary variable winning device 37, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special variable winning device 38 may be used. Specifically, the variable winning device is, for example, one in which a detour 37 g (retention area, second flow path) is added to the flow path 38f (flow path, first flow path) of the special variable winning device 38. You may. Further, the opening / closing member that can be converted into a closed state in which the winning opening is closed and an open state in which the winning opening is opened is not limited to the slide member, and can be appropriately changed. In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 13A, a slide member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by sliding back and forth is provided as the opening / closing member. For example, as shown in FIG. 13B, it may be a rotating member (movable member 37b) that opens and closes the winning opening by rotating around the rotating shaft Z.

Further, the retention area for retaining the game ball is not limited to the detour 37g (second flow path), and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the retention region is, for example, a space in which the upstream portion and the downstream portion are not separated, that is, a space in which the partition wall 373k that separates the upstream portion and the downstream portion of the detour 37g is removed from the detour 37g. , The space may be a space obtained by removing a portion of the partition wall 373k other than the front end portion (the portion separating the inlet 37g1 and the outlet 37g2) from the detour 37g.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the game ball flowing from the first flow path (downflow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through one communication port (inlet 37g1) is the other communication. It is higher than the rate at which the game ball flows from the first flow path (flow path 37f) to the second flow path (detour 37g) through the mouth (outlet 37g2), and one of them communicates with the slide member (movable member 37b). It is possible to provide a height difference (in the case of this embodiment, a step or an inclination) so that the mouth is arranged at a position higher than the other communication port. With this configuration, the game ball can smoothly roll on the first flow path (flow path 37f) and the second flow path (detour 37g), so that the first flow path and the second flow path can be smoothly rolled. It is possible to prevent ball clogging.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the ball power of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b) on the first flow path (flow path 37f) or the second flow path (detour 37g). (In the case of this embodiment, the lower wall protrusion 37b5, the left protrusion 37b6, and the right protrusion 37b7) can be provided. With this configuration, the residence time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the slide member (movable member 37b) can be further extended, so that a predetermined gaming state (in the case of the present embodiment, a time saving state) ) It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of game balls in the game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as a ball power suppressing portion, a lower wall protruding portion 37b5, an upstream front wall protruding portion 371d, a rear wall protruding portion 373d, and other starting parts (convex parts) are provided in the flow path 37f, and a detour 37g. The left ridge portion 37b6, the right ridge portion 37b7, the intermediate protrusion portion 373k1 and the like are provided with a rising portion (convex portion), but the ball power suppressing portion is not limited to these and can be changed as appropriate. Further, as the ball power suppressing portion, a down portion (recess) may be provided in the flow path 37f or the detour 37g. Specifically, for example, a groove that meanders may be formed on the upper surface of the movable member 37b as a fusube so that the game ball rolls while meandering along the groove. Further, as the ball power suppressing portion, undulations (both the undulating portion and the undulating portion) may be provided on the flow path 37f and the detour 37g so that the game ball rolls while meandering due to the undulations. Further, the ball power suppressing portion is not limited to the rising portion (convex portion) and the prone portion (concave portion), and can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area 32, in addition to the retention device having the game ball retention function (normal variation winning device 37), the members for suppressing the ball power (obstacle nail, windmill, flow path 615, guide unit 616). Etc.), that is, a retention member having a game ball retention function is provided. Therefore, since the game ball can be retained in the right game area by the retention device and the retention member, the rolling mode of the game ball in the right game area can be more enjoyed. In addition, a method of retaining the game ball by providing unevenness on the surface, a method of retaining the game ball by using a material having a high coefficient of friction, and a method of performing a constant operation with the driving force of a driving source (solenoid, etc.) A predetermined member or device may be provided with a game ball retention function by a method of retaining a ball, a method of retaining a game ball by providing a distribution device, or the like.

Further, since the normal variable winning device 37 can hold the game ball in the front-rear direction of the game machine 10 by the starting portion and the detour 37g, the holding member (a holding device other than the normal variable winning device 37 may be used. ) Is preferably configured so that the game ball can be retained in a direction other than the front-back direction (horizontal direction or vertical direction of the game machine 10). As a result, the game machine can be three-dimensionally retained by the retention member (and / or the retention device other than the normal variation winning device 37) and the normal variation winning device 37, so that the residence time can be increased. At the same time, the interest in the rolling of the game ball is improved.

Further, an out port 30c, a general winning opening 35, or the like (hereinafter referred to as "out port 30c or the like") may be provided in the middle of the detour 37g. As a result, the player's attention can be drawn to whether or not the game ball that has failed to win the normal variable winning device 37 comes out of the normal variable winning device 37, which improves the interest and the ball is released. It is possible to adjust so that the rate does not become too large, and to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging in the detour 37g.

Further, when the out port 30c or the like is provided in the middle of the detour 37g, the game ball may flow into the out port 30c or the like when the movable member 37b operates. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, a through hole 37b11 is provided in a portion of the movable member 37b that forms a detour 37g when the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is in the open state (may be in the closed state), the positions of the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c in the vertical direction coincide with each other (the through hole 37b11 is located directly above the out port 30c). When the game ball on the movable member 37b is in a state where it can flow into the out port 30c and the movable member 37b is in the closed state (may be in the open state), the through hole 37b11 and the out port 30c move up and down. It is also possible to configure the game balls on the movable member 37b to be unable or difficult to flow into the out port 30c because the positions of the directions do not match (the through hole 37b11 is displaced from directly above the out port 30c). is there.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses a CPU operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach and reach), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting port 2 switch in the normal variable winning device 37. 37a, starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning opening 97, winning opening switch 35a, multiple (1 to x, 2 in this embodiment) large winning opening switches arranged in the special variable winning device 38. 38a, connected to the gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, a negative logic signal such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is input. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts to is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are the second inputs. It is input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a are input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of a certification body (not shown) connected to the data bus 140 and a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to output the opening / closing data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38 and the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37. An output port 134 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the starting port 3 in the second starting winning opening 97 The switch 97a, the winning opening switch 35a, the large winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid and the management of the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT etc. for

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect the above and input the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC-for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IO RESET signal) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing a game state transition in the present embodiment. The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, a second specific gaming state ST3, a third specific gaming state ST4, a fourth specific gaming state ST5, and a fifth specific gaming state ST6. In addition to this, as special game states, there are a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), which are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability from which the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the main in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 by hitting left, and aiming for a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97 by hitting right. You can do it. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. In addition, each game state is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, the special figure probability is low, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. As will be described later, in this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST1. ..

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is Fuden support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, although the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In this first specific game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and a right-handed hit is aimed at the normal variation winning device 37, and special figure 1 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.

The second specific game state ST3 is the same as the first specific game state ST2 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state. In addition, in the third specific game state ST4, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is set to the probability change mode, and the end condition of the normal electric support is the start of the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won or the big hit is obtained. 1 It is the same as the specific game state ST2.

In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display. The time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game is in a certain state. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is small hit RUSH. Further, the main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this fourth specific game state ST5, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST1, and the special figure is aimed at the second start winning opening 97 by hitting right. 2 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game. Since the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game, and the small hit has a higher probability of winning than the big hit, the small hit is higher in this fourth specific game state ST5. It occurs frequently and the number of balls held by the player increases. Since small hits occur frequently in this way, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

The fifth specific game state ST6 is the same as the fourth specific game state ST5 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the same small hit RUSH as in the 4th specific game state ST5, but in this 5th specific game state ST6, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes long and a small hit occurs. Can hardly be expected. Further, the main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

Of these six gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because it has a general electric support, and the first specific game state ST2 and the third specific game state ST4 are normal because they are in a high probability state. This is a state more advantageous to the player than the game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. Further, since the fourth specific game state ST5 is a state in which the player's ball is increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific It is a state more advantageous to the player than the game state ST4. The fifth specific game state ST6 has almost the same advantage as the normal game state ST1, but it is also more advantageous than the normal game state ST1 in that the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is executed. I can say.

The transition of the game state is the end of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result, the digestion of the specified number of games, the winning of the fall lottery which is the transition lottery to the low probability state, and the start of the special figure variation display game which is a big hit. Is done by. Basically, if the special result that triggered the start of the special gaming state is a probabilistic jackpot that makes it a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state, it shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 and the special If it is a normal jackpot that is set to a low probability state after the end of the game state, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST3.

When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the second specific game state ST3. In this case, the period of staying in the second specific game state ST3 is the period from the end of the special game state to the execution of 100 special figure variation display games including the number of games executed in the first specific game state ST2. .. Since the effect modes of the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 are the same chance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the transition has been made.

If the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2 and the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the special result, the game shifts to the third specific game state ST4. Here, since the effect mode is the probability variation mode, the player can grasp that it is in a high probability state. If the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, if the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is started without winning the fall lottery in the third specific game state ST4, the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5.

The fourth specific game state ST4 stays only during the period in which the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, is executed. In the case of the special figure variable display game in which the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the period during which the special gaming state based on the small hit is executed after the small hit is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game is special figure 1. Since the variable display game is interrupted, the player will stay for a period that is the sum of the variable time and the interruption period of the special figure 1 variable display game.

By providing the fourth specific game state ST5, it is possible to provide a period for increasing the player's ball by a small hit before the special game state based on the big hit is started, and in the fourth specific game state ST5. It is possible to give a lot of profits to the player by the increase of the number of balls held and the subsequent increase of the number of balls held in the special gaming state. In particular, in the situation where the transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 is possible, the next big hit is not derived even if the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times after the special game state based on the probability change big hit is completed. It is in a state, and by making it possible to give a profit to the player in such a situation, it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the big hit is not derived. On the contrary, it is possible to have an interest that is not found in conventional game machines, which is expected to be in a fitted state.

If the fall lottery is won in the 4th specific game state ST5, the process shifts to the 5th specific game state ST6. Since the effect mode is the same as that of the 4th specific game state ST5, there is no change in appearance, but in the 5th specific game state ST6, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is long, so that the special figure 1 variation. Both the display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a state in which the variable display is displayed, and the occurrence of small hits can hardly be expected. This state continues until a big hit is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, since the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit has already been started at the time of shifting to the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure probability in the fourth specific game state ST5 is too small for the player. It will be meaningless. However, by shifting to the 5th specific game state ST6 where the derivation of small hits can hardly be expected by winning the fall lottery in this way, it is possible to give new game characteristics by the fall lottery, and the interest of the game. Can be improved.

In the above example, if the fall lottery is won during the 4th specific game state ST5, the state shifts to the low probability state and shifts to the 5th specific game state ST6, but the 4th specific game state ST5 is maintained. It is also possible to ensure that the player can benefit during the running period of the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit by keeping the frequency of deriving the small hits unchanged. Further, if the fall lottery is won during the 4th specific gaming state ST5, the transition to the 5th specific gaming state ST6 is assumed, but the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 may be performed. Further, although the fifth specific game state ST6 is set to the same effect mode as the fourth specific game state ST5, an effect mode set only in the fifth specific game state ST6 may be provided.

22 and 23 show an example of the progress of the game. FIG. 22A shows a case where the fall lottery is won before the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game is executed after the probability variation jackpot occurs. In this example, first, the normal game state ST1 is in a low probability state and there is no general electric support, and the effect is a normal mode effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. Since this normal game state ST1 is a state in which the game is determined to proceed by hitting left, the game control device 100 turns off the first game state display unit 56. Further, the effect control device 300 does not give a right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handed.

The result of the special figure 1 variable display game executed in this normal game state ST1 is a probability variation jackpot that makes the first special result, and is in the first special game state after the end of the special figure 1 variable display game (t11). .. In the first special gaming state, the special variable prize device 38 is opened so that a large number of prize balls can be obtained. In addition, the effect state is the first special game effect corresponding to the first special game state. Since this first special game state is a state in which the game is advanced by hitting right, the game control device 100 turns on the first game state display unit 56. In addition, the effect control device 300 performs a right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handed.

When this first special gaming state ends, it becomes the first specific gaming state ST2 which has a high probability state and has a general electric support (t12). In the first specific game state ST2, since it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shorter than that of the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variation display games can be executed in a short time. In this first specific game state, the effect state is the chance mode effect. Since the first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the game is determined to proceed by hitting the right side, the game control device 100 turns on the first game state display unit 56. In addition, the effect control device 300 performs a right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handed.

In this example, the fall lottery is won in the first specific game state ST2, and based on this, the state shifts to the low probability state and becomes the second specific game state ST3 (t13). Fuden support will remain as it is. In the second specific game state ST3, it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. Further, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shorter than that of the normal game state ST1, and a large number of special figure variation display games can be executed in a short time. Even in this second specific game state, the production state is a state in which the chance mode production is maintained, and it is difficult to grasp that the fall lottery has been won. Since the second specific game state ST3 is a state in which the game is determined to proceed by hitting the right side, the game control device 100 turns on the first game state display unit 56. In addition, the effect control device 300 performs a right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handed.

After that, when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end (t12) of the first special game state reaches the specified number in the second specific game state ST3, the normal electric support is terminated and the normal game state ST1 is set (. t14). In this example, the probability state is already in the low probability state, so the low probability state is maintained. Further, with the transition to the normal game state ST1, the state is set so that the game proceeds by hitting the left side, so that the game control device 100 turns off the first game state display unit 56. In addition, the effect control device 300 ends the right-handed instruction notification for instructing the right-handed person. The establishment of the transition condition here is that the 101st special figure variation display game counting from the end of the first special game state is started in the normal probability state. In this case, with the start of the 101st special figure variation display game in which the transition condition is satisfied, the launch direction in which the game proceeds and the notification mode of the launch direction are changed so as to correspond to the shifted game state. ing.

FIG. 22B shows a case where the fall lottery was not won even if the specified number of special figure variation display games were executed after the probability variation jackpot occurred. The probability variation jackpot is derived in the normal game state ST1 to become the first special game state (t21), and after the end of the first special game state until the first specific game state ST2 is reached (t22) is the same as in FIG. 22 (a). Is.

In this example, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the first special game state (t22) in the first specific game state ST2 is a specified number ( Here, it has reached 100 times) (t23). In this case, after the end of the special figure variation display game, which is the specified number, the game shifts to the third specific game state ST4.

Even in the third specific game state ST4, there is a high probability state and there is a general electric support, and in the second specific game state ST3, it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game progresses mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. To do. Further, in the third specific game state, the effect state becomes the probability change mode effect, and it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the player is in the high probability state. Since the third specific game state ST4 is a state in which the game is determined to proceed by hitting the right side, the game control device 100 turns on the first game state display unit 56. In addition, the effect control device 300 performs a right-handed instruction notification to instruct right-handed.

After that, when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4, the probability shifts to the low probability state, the normal electric support ends, and the normal game state ST1 shifts to (t24). The fall lottery is won at the start of the special figure variation display game, and when the fall lottery is won, the transition effect (first specific effect) is performed from the start of the special figure variation display game. As will be described later, this transition effect is executed in common when the special figure variation display game which is a big hit in the third specific game state ST4 is started and when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4. It is intended to arouse the anxiety and anticipation of the player by making it difficult to immediately grasp that the player has won the fall lottery or that it is a big hit, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, with the transition to the normal game state ST1, the state is set so that the game proceeds by hitting the left side, so that the game control device 100 turns off the first game state display unit 56. In addition, the effect control device 300 ends the right-handed instruction notification for instructing the right-handed person. Therefore, the right-handed instruction notification is not performed in the transition effect.

FIG. 23A shows a case where the first special result is derived in the first specific gaming state ST2. In this case, even if the special figure variation display game that is the first special result is started (t31), the probability state is left as the high probability state and the normal electric support is also left as it is. In addition, the production state is also left as the chance mode production. Then, when the special figure variation display game ends, the special game state is started (t23). With the start of the special game state, the probability shifts to the low probability state and the Fuden support ends (t32). Further, in this example, a normal jackpot that produces the first special result is derived, and when the first special gaming state based on the first special result ends, a second specific gaming state that has a low probability state and has a normal electric support is provided. It becomes ST3 (t33).

Further, since all of the first specific game state ST2, the first special game state, and the second specific game state ST3 are defined to advance the game by hitting the right, the game control device 100 is the first. 1 The game status display unit 56 is maintained in the lit state. In addition, the effect control device 300 maintains a right-handed instruction notification for instructing right-handed.

Similarly, when the first special result is derived in the second specific game state ST3, the probability state remains the low probability state even if the special figure variation display game that becomes the first special result is started. Fuden support is also left as it is. Furthermore, the production state is also left as the chance mode production. Then, with the start of the special game state, the low probability state is maintained and the Fuden support ends. That is, even if the special figure variation display game that is the first special result is started in the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3, the game state does not change.

FIG. 23B shows a case where the first special result is derived in the third specific gaming state ST4. In this case, when the special figure variation display game, which is the first special result, is started, the probability state remains the high probability state, but the normal electric support ends, and the fourth specific game state ST5 is reached (t40). .. When the Fuden support ends, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97, and in the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the effect state is a small hit RUSH effect corresponding to the fourth specific game state. This fourth specific game state ST5 is continued until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, a transition effect is performed at the start of the fourth specific game state ST5. The transition effect is executed when a big hit is obtained in the third specific game state ST4 or when the fall lottery is won, but when the fall lottery is won as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the fall lottery is won. From the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the right-handed instruction notification is not performed. Therefore, if the right-handed instruction notification is performed in the transition effect in the case of a big hit, the player can grasp that the big hit will occur. For this reason, the right-handed instruction notification is temporarily not displayed during the execution of the transition effect (t40 to t41).

However, the first game state display unit 56 is maintained in the lit state corresponding to the game state. That is, during this transition effect period, the display of the first game state display unit 56 and the execution of the right-handed instruction notification do not correspond to each other. Therefore, for a player who knows the display of the first game state display unit 56, it is necessary to know that the player shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5 at an earlier timing than the player who does not know this, that is, it becomes a big hit. Can be done.

The timing (t41) for resuming the right-handed instruction notification is, for example, the timing at which it is found that the transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 is performed in the transition effect. Of course, it is not limited to this timing, and for example, if the right-handed instruction notification is restarted earlier than this timing, it can be suggested that the right-handed instruction notification shifts to the fourth specific gaming state ST5, that is, a big hit. ..

The fourth specific game state ST5 is a game state in which the special figure 2 variable display game in which the probability of small hits is higher than that in the special figure 1 variable display game can be executed with high frequency. In the example of FIG. 23 (b), after the start (t40) of the fourth specific game state ST5, the second start winning opening 97 is won and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t42). This special figure 2 variable display game ends with a missed result. After that, the second start winning opening 97 is newly won, and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t43). This special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit whose result is a second special result, and becomes a second special gaming state with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t45 to t46). In this second special gaming state, the special variable prize device 38 is opened so that a prize ball can be obtained. Since the second special game state is also a state in which the game progresses by hitting the right side, the game control device 100 keeps the first game state display unit 56 in the lit state. In addition, the effect control device 300 maintains a right-handed instruction notification for instructing right-handed.

The special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted due to the derivation of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (t44), and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special gaming state (t46). .. Since the variable time does not progress during the interruption, the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game is the stop display time of the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game in addition to the time set at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. And will be extended by the period of the second special game state. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game which is the first special result started in the third specific game state ST4 is longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game which is the first special result in the first specific game state ST2. It is supposed to be long. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient period of the fourth specific game state ST5.

After the second special game state ends, when a game ball newly wins in the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (t47). After that, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed a plurality of times and the second special game state is generated, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game ends, the first special result is stopped and displayed (t48), and when the stop display time ends, the special figure 1 variation display game ends (t49). Along with this, the fourth specific gaming state ST5 ends and the first special gaming state starts (t49). Further, as the first special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the missing result (t48).

In this way, by setting the fourth specific game state ST5 before the first special game state, the prize ball that can be obtained based on the small hit generated in the fourth specific game state ST5 and the first special game state. The prize balls that can be obtained in the player can obtain a large number of prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), in the third specific game state ST4, the general electric support is terminated with the start of the special figure variation display game which is a big hit, and is shown in FIG. 22 (b). As described above, the change in the Fuden support is the same as when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state ST4. As a result, it is possible to notify that either the fall lottery winning or the big hit winning event, which has a significantly different value for the player, will occur due to the end of the hobby support in the third specific game state ST4. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving a feeling of anxiety and expectation.

In particular, it is constant from the start of the special figure variation display game in both the case of starting the special figure variation display game which is a big hit in the third specific game state ST4 and the case of winning the fall lottery in the third specific game state ST4. By executing a common transition effect during the time and not being notified of the right-handed instruction, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing that he / she has won the fall lottery or that he / she is a big hit. It is possible to arouse a sense of anxiety and anticipation, and to further improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 24 shows an example of the display on the display device 41. FIG. 24A shows an example of the display in the normal game state ST1. In the center of the display area of the display device 41, among the first decorative games that make up the decorative special figure variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game-related decorative special figure variable display game is displayed. 85a is provided. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of a combination of three identification information, and one of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss is displayed according to the result of the special figure variation display game. In the normal game state ST1, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation, so the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the irregular variable special figure 2 variable display game is not displayed but is displayed. Is also good.

Further, in the lower center of the display area, a first storage display unit 83a for displaying the decorative special drawing start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is provided. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory and is displayed side by side in the memory order. Here, there are three first start memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left each time it is digested. In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In addition, in FIG. 24A, a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is performed for the first start memory having the first digestion order.

To the left of the first storage display unit 83a, an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first storage display unit 83a is transferred to the running memory display unit 84, and the result or variation of the special figure variation display game to be executed The pattern and the like are suggested by the display mode.

In the upper right part of the display area, a first start storage number display unit 86a for displaying the first start storage number is provided. The first start memory number display unit 86a displays the number of the first start memories numerically, and FIG. 24A shows that there are three first start memories. Further, in the upper left portion of the display area, an effect mode display unit 87 for displaying the current effect mode is provided. Here, it is shown that the mode is the normal mode, that is, the normal game state ST1.

In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variation display game is not generated, the start memory display unit for displaying the second start memory is not provided, but the special figure 2 variation is provided. When the second start memory for holding the start of the display game is to be generated, the second start memory is displayed in the same manner as the first memory display unit 83a and the first start memory number display unit 86a.

Further, the display in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 is basically the same as the display in FIG. 24 (a), although the background display and the arrangement position of each display unit are different. The same display is performed.

FIG. 24B shows an example of the display in the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6. In the upper right part of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first start memory number display unit 86a that displays the number of first start memories, and a special figure 1 variable display among the first decorative game that makes a decorative special figure variable display game. Special figure 1 variable display game related to the special figure 1 variable display game of the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a for displaying the game and the special figure 1 variable display game related to the special figure variable display game A second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a for displaying the above is provided.

The first start memory number display unit 86a displays the number of the first start memory numerically, and FIG. 24 (b) shows that the first start memory is 0. The first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85c displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the information. The second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying a plurality of identification information in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the information. The result is displayed in a result mode composed of one identification information, and one of "◯" indicating a big hit, "Δ" indicating a small hit, and "x" indicating a loss is displayed.

At the lower right of the display area, among the first decorative games that make up the decorative special figure variable display game, the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b that displays the decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and Among the second decorative games that make up the decorative special figure variable display game, the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game related to the special figure 2 variable display game is provided.

The first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b displays the decoration special figure variation display game in the same manner as the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a. Further, the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b displays the decorative special figure variable display game in the same manner as the second decorative special figure 1 game display unit 88a. In this embodiment, since the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated, the second start memory number display unit for displaying the number of the second start memories is not provided. , Special Figure 2 When the second start memory for holding the start of the variable display game is generated, the second start memory for displaying the number of the second start memory is displayed in the same manner as the first start memory number display unit 86a. A number display unit is provided.

Further, in the center of the display area, an effect display unit 89 for displaying an effect by a character or the like is provided. The effect display unit 89 mainly displays the effect according to the variation pattern and the result of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation, and the player can display the effect according to the effect display to show the progress of the special figure variation display game. And the result can be grasped.

In the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6, unlike the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a in FIG. 24 (a), the identification information is not displayed in a large size, but the result is The result mode may be displayed in a large size only when it is derived. For example, the identification information is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area from the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a or the first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b corresponding to the special figure variation display game from which the result is derived. Then, when the stop display time ends, the original display unit is displayed so that the identification information is reduced. Even during such display, the display of the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a and / or the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b is maintained.

The effect mode display unit 87 indicates that the small hit RUSH mode is set, that is, the fourth specific game state ST5 or the fifth specific game state ST6. Further, in the lower left portion of the display area, a prize ball number display unit 91 indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the second special game state during execution of the second special game state is provided. Here, it is shown that 30 prize balls have been won in the second special game state. Further, in the lower left of the display area, the cumulative number of prize balls obtained from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4 to the transition to the first special game state is shown. A display unit 92 is provided. Here, it is shown that 600 prize balls have been won so far.

In addition, the total number of prize balls displayed in the total number of prize balls display unit 92 is also added to the number of prize balls acquired in the first special game state, and the first special game is started from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 accompanying the end of the third specific game state ST4. The number of prize balls acquired by the end of the state may be indicated. Further, the number of prize balls acquired in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 is also added, and is acquired from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the return to the normal game state ST1. The number of prize balls may be shown. However, in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, although a certain number of prize balls are acquired, the possessed balls are consumed more than that, so that the first specific game state ST2 , The number of prize balls in the second specific game state ST3 and the third specific game state ST4 may not be added.

At the lower center of the display area, a continuous number display unit 96 is provided, which starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and displays the number of big hits in a specific period when the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The continuous number display unit 96 can display in a game state other than the normal game state ST1. FIG. 24B shows that three big hits have occurred.

The start condition of the specific period is satisfied by deriving the big hit in the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period is satisfied by returning from the game state other than the normal game state ST1 to the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in principle, the continuous number display unit 96 sets the first big hit in the normal game state ST1 which is the big hit for which the start condition of the specific period is satisfied, and the number of big hits generated before returning to the normal game state ST1 Is displayed.

However, in a specific case, even if the jackpot is exceptionally derived in the normal game state ST1, the addition result up to that point is taken over and added instead of the first time. As a specific case in the present embodiment, a big hit is derived in the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery, or the other that has been started before the end of one special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery. There is a case where the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit and shifts to the specific game state again.

For example, if a fall lottery is won in the special figure change display game in the third specific game state ST4, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 at the start of the special figure change display game, but the special figure won in this fall lottery. During the execution of the variable display game, the first specific effect of suggesting or notifying that the fall lottery has been won is performed. In this first specific effect, it is clearly notified that the fall lottery has been won just before the end of the special figure variation display game, so that the player has won the fall lottery until the end of the special figure variation display game. I do not know clearly, and I believe that I am still in a high probability state and play the game. Further, in this case, an effect of suggesting or notifying that the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, is being executed in parallel may be performed. In addition, in the case of a big hit in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, it may not be clearly notified that the fall lottery was won as a result of the first specific effect. Therefore, if the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is reset only on the condition that the normal game state ST1 is entered, the player who thinks that the specific period continues may feel distrust.

For this reason, if a big hit is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery or the special figure fluctuation display game that started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, Even if the result is derived in the normal game state ST1, it is treated in the same way as the big hit derived in the specific game state, and the number of times displayed on the continuous number display unit 96 is the number of big hits before shifting to the normal game state ST1. I am trying to take over and add.

Similarly, when the cumulative number of prize balls display unit 92 shows the number of prize balls acquired from the end of the normal game state ST1 to the return to the normal game state ST1, the special figure variation display that won the fall lottery is also obtained. If a jackpot is derived in a game or a special figure variation display game that was started before the end of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, it will be treated in the same way as the jackpot derived in the specific game state, and the normal game The number of prize balls before the transition to the state ST1 is taken over and added.

That is, the effect control device 300 can set a specific period that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and information on the game from the start to the end of the specific period. (The number of big hits and the number of prize balls won) can be accumulated and notified. Further, in a specific case, the information before the transition to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and the addition is performed.

In addition, a right-handed instruction notification 99 for instructing right-handed is displayed at the lower right of the display area. In addition to the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6, the right-handed instruction notification 99 includes a first specific game state ST2, a second specific game state ST3, a third specific game state ST4, and a first special game state. And it is also displayed in the second special game state. The right-handed instruction notification 99 is not displayed when the game is advanced by left-handed, but the right-handed instruction 99 may not be displayed even when the game is advanced by right-handed (for example, t40 to t41 in FIG. ). That is, the fact that the right-handed instruction notification 99 is not displayed does not clearly indicate that the player is left-handed.

FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (h) show an example of a transition effect executed when a fall lottery is won or a big hit is obtained in the third specific game state ST4. When the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the variable display is started on the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a, and then the transition is made as shown in FIG. 24 (d). The production starts. This transition effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight each other, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the presence / absence of a fall lottery are notified based on the result of the battle. Further, the decorative special figure variation display game and the start memory display are performed in the same manner as those shown in FIG. 24 (b).

With the start of this transition effect, the right-handed instruction notification 99 ends. As mentioned above, this is executed when the transition effect is a big hit (maintain right-handed) or when the fall lottery is won (shifted to left-handed), so if the right-handed is clearly notified, it may be a big hit. This is because it can be grasped.

As shown in FIG. 24 (e), the effect of fighting the characters is performed, and the result of the fight is shown when a predetermined time elapses. If the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 24 (f). After that, the process shifts to the production of the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 24 (a). In addition, an instruction is displayed instructing the player to return to left-handed when shifting to the normal game state ST1 effect. On the other hand, when the result is a big hit in the special figure variation display game, the ally character 89a wins as shown in FIG. 24 (g). After that, the process shifts to the production of the fourth specific game state ST5 as shown in FIG. 24B, and the right-handed instruction notification 99 is restarted.

Further, when the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure variation display game without winning the fall lottery, the transition effect may be performed as a so-called ghost effect. In this case, after the character fights as shown in FIG. 24 (e), the result of the draw is made as shown in FIG. 24 (h). After that, the process returns to the production of the third specific game state ST4 as shown in FIG. 24C, and the right-handed instruction notification 99 is restarted.

The timing of transition to the fourth specific game state is set at the start of the special figure variation display game that is a big hit, but it is sufficient as long as the special figure variation display game that is a big hit is being executed, even after the start time. good. Further, regardless of the execution of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, the game may shift to the fourth specific game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Predetermined transition conditions include winning a transition lottery, executing a predetermined number of games, and deriving a specific result in a special figure variation display game.

In addition, when a plurality of second start memories, which are the execution rights of the special figure 2 variable display game, can be stored, whether or not a big hit is made before the start of the corresponding special figure 2 variable display game for the second start memory. If it is found that there is a second start memory that is a big hit, the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory that is a big hit is entered into the fourth specific game state before the start of the game. You may want to migrate.

In addition, although the high-probability state is terminated by winning the fall lottery, the high-probability state may be terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state. However, the high probability state may be set until the next derivation of the first special result.

From the above, a game in which a variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. In the machine, it is possible to convert into a control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize. , The normal variable winning device 37 capable of generating the execution right of the variable display game by winning, and the control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to the first operating state and the first operating state. A low-probability state and a high-probability state higher than the low-probability state are defined as a second operating state in which a prize is easily won and a probability state in which the result of the variable display game is a special result controlled by any of the operating states. If it is set to either one and it is in a high probability state, it is configured to perform a fall lottery to shift to a low probability state every time the variable display game is executed, and if it is in the second operation state, the fall lottery is won. If this is the case, it is possible to shift to the first operating state, and even if the player has not won the fall lottery in the second operating state, the first is to execute the variable display game that gives a special result. It is possible to shift to one operating state. Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 the same between the case where the fall lottery is won and the case where the big hit is derived, which makes it difficult to distinguish and improves the interest of the game. it can.

In addition, the control means can set the second operation state in a predetermined period from the end of the special game state to the execution of the variable display game a predetermined number of times, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, the control means has a high probability state. In a certain case, the second operating state can be set, and in a predetermined period, even if the fall lottery is won in the case of the second operating state, the game does not shift to the first operating state and is in the second operating state. Even if you execute a variable display game that gives a special result without winning the fall lottery, you will not shift to the first operation state, and if the high probability state continues after the lapse of a predetermined period, you will win the fall lottery. This means that the game shifts to the first operating state based on the satisfaction of either the case where the game is performed or the case where the variable display game which is a special result is executed without winning the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the change in the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 the same between the case where the fall lottery is won and the case where the big hit is derived, which makes it difficult to distinguish and improves the interest of the game. it can.

In addition, the first start winning opening 36, which forms the starting winning opening, and the starting winning, which is located on the downstream side of the ordinary variable winning device 37 and at a position where the ordinary variable winning device 37 can be won, can be won. A second starting winning opening 97 and a mouthful second starting winning opening 97 are provided, and the control means executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. , The second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and at least the second variable display game can be executed. The result of the game has a second special result in which the probability of being derived is constant regardless of the game state, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game. When the second special game state that is advantageous to the person is executed, the first variable display game is interrupted during the execution of the second special game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a large number of second variable display games having a high probability of small hits based on the start of the special figure variable display game that is a big hit, and it is possible to give profits to the player. Can be improved.

Further, in the high probability state, the execution time of the variable display game is made shorter than in the low probability state, and the special result includes the first special result that can change the probability derived according to the game state. , There is a second special result in which the probability of being derived regardless of the game state is constant, and the probability that the second special result is derived in the second variable display game is higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. With a high probability, when the result of the variable display game is the first special result, the first special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the result of the variable display game is the second special result. In that case, the second special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the result of the second variable display game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first variable display game, and the second special game When the state is executed, the first variable display game is interrupted during the execution of the second special gaming state, and the first variable display game is restarted when the second special gaming state ends. It will be configured. Therefore, it is possible to execute a large number of second variable display games having a high probability of small hits based on the start of the special figure variable display game that is a big hit, and it is possible to give profits to the player. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the other variable display game becomes the second special result and the second special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the other variable display game is executed. One of the variable display games is interrupted from the time when the variable time of the second special result is stopped and displayed until the end of the second special game state, but the stopped display time of the other variable display game is interrupted. One of the variable display games may be interrupted from the time when the second special game state is started after the end to the end of the second special game state. The same applies to the modified examples described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the other variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the other variable display game is executed. When the fluctuation time of the first special result is stopped and displayed, one of the fluctuation display games is forcibly stopped due to the missed result, but the stop display time of the other fluctuation display game ends. When the first special game state is started, one of the variable display games may be forcibly stopped as a result of being missed. The same applies to the modified examples described later.

In addition, the start time of interruption or forced stop may be different between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and it is selected from the time when the special result is stopped and displayed and the time when the special game state is started. You can do it. Further, the start of interruption or forced stop is not limited to the time when the special result is stopped and displayed or the special game state is started, and may be started at other timings. The end of the interruption may be a timing other than the end of the special gaming state. Further, even when the result of the other variable display game becomes the first special result and the first special gaming state is executed during the execution of one variable display game, the interrupted state may be generated. Further, with respect to each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether to suspend or forcibly stop when the first special result or the second special result is derived.

Since the ordinary variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment has a game ball retention function of retaining the game ball on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, the game ball is retained on the movable member 37b while the movable member 37b is in the closed state. When the movable member 37b is opened, the game ball can be swallowed (the game ball staying on the movable member 37b is dropped to win a prize in the general electric winning opening 37d). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the ordinary variable winning device 37, that is, the game balls that cannot win the general electric winning opening 37d even though they have arrived at the ordinary variable winning device 37.

Further, since the second start winning opening 97 is arranged below the ordinary variable winning device 37, the game ball that fails to win the ordinary variable winning device 37 can win the second starting winning opening 97. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 reduces the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the main starting area is the normal electric winning opening 37d (the first). 1 In the specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4), it is possible to make it difficult for the second start winning opening 97 to win a prize.

The main starting area of the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 is the general electric winning opening 37d, and the main start area of the fourth specific game state ST5 and the fifth specific game state ST6. Is the second start winning opening 97, so in the case of the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the third specific gaming state ST4, that is, when there is a high / low probability support state, the second starting winning opening 97 It is impossible (difficult) to win a prize, and it is possible to win a prize in the second start winning opening 97 only in the case of the 4th specific game state ST5 and the 5th specific game state ST6, that is, when there is no high probability support. Is preferable. When a game ball wins in the second start winning opening 97 and a small hit occurs in the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, the ball output rate is large from the design value. There is a risk of divergence.

The winning rate for the ordinary variable winning device 37 can be calculated using the following formula (1).
Winning rate [%] = Number of game balls that have won in the Fuden winning opening 37d / Number of game balls that have arrived at the normal variable winning device 37 (game balls that have flowed into the starting point of the flow path 37f) x 100 ... (1) )
In the present embodiment, the second start winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right of the game area 32, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is arranged above the second starting winning opening 97. Since the normal variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37. Further, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to the start of the operation and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 (the game ball rolls from the start point to the end point of the flow path 37f). By adjusting (time required for) etc., the failure of winning the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure is made almost 0, that is, the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal figure is It is also possible to make the winning rate almost 100%. By setting the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing to almost 100%, it is possible to make it difficult for the second starting winning opening 97 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37 to win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the desired performance (ball output rate).

On the other hand, in the high probability support state (4th specific game state ST5), since the normal variable winning device 37 does not open, the game ball can be won in the 2nd starting winning opening 97, and the small hit RUSH is realized. can do. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to configure the second start winning opening 97 to win a prize only when there is no high probability support (fourth specific gaming state ST5), and it is possible to realize the desired performance. ..

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the normal map fluctuation time (that is, the normal map fluctuation time) is 200 msec, and the normal map stop time (that is, the normal map display time) is 100 msec. Yes, the normal power operation time (that is, the sum of the total normal power release time and the total wait time per hit state of the normal figure) is 5800 msec, and the ending time (that is, the normal power remaining ball). When the sum of the processing time and the ending time of the normal figure is 700 msec, the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is at least 1000 msec (= 700 msec + 200 msec + 100 msec). In this case, the length of the flow path 37f and the detour 37g, the number and shape of the undulations provided on the flow path 37f and the detour 37g, etc. are appropriately designed, and the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is 1000 msec. By approaching to, it becomes possible to make the winning rate of the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing almost 100%.

Of course, as in the example shown here, the winning rate of the normal variable winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing becomes almost 100% according to the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation. , The residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be set, or conversely, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the hit state of the normal drawing according to the residence time of the game ball in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation may be set so that the winning rate of the movable member 37b becomes almost 100%.

That is, in the present embodiment, one of the residence time of the game ball in the ordinary variable winning device 37 and the time from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b to the start of the operation is set according to the other (substantially the same as the other). By setting the time, the time equal to or longer than the other, etc.), the winning rate of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 can be increased. In addition, by increasing the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 by increasing the portion that suppresses the ball power such as the rising portion and the fusube portion, the operation is performed from the end of the operation of the movable member 37b during the normal electric interval. (Until the start), more game balls can be retained on the movable member 37b, and when the movable member 37b is in the open state, the game balls accumulated on the movable member 37b are awarded a prize. Therefore, the winning rate of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ordinary variable winning device 37 has a game ball retention function, and a second starting winning opening 97 and a special variable winning device 38 are arranged below the ordinary variable winning device 37. Therefore, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the second start winning opening 97 or the special variable winning device 38 should be longer than when the normal variable winning device 37 does not have the game ball retention function. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an unrecommended striking method and increase the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening (opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 990).

Left-handed hitting is recommended in the normal game state ST1, but when the right-handed hit is made in the normal game state ST1 and the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 97, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. In the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is set longer than that in the second specific game state, but by performing aiming (stop hitting, timing hitting, etc.), a big winning opening It is possible to aim for a prize. When the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state ST1. By aiming at the start of the small hit game state (start of opening the large winning opening) and hitting the game ball, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hit game state. It is possible to make a prize in the winning opening. Therefore, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that a non-recommended striking method (right striking) is performed.

On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has the game ball retention function, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed during the normal game state, even if the game ball is started to be hit at the same time as the start of the small hit game state (the opening of the large winning opening), the game ball is started. Cannot reach the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the small hit game state. Therefore, it is useless to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1, and therefore, it is not recommended in the normal game state ST1 to execute the special figure 2 variable display game during the normal game state ST1. It is possible to avoid being hit. As described above, according to the present embodiment, an illegal winning by capture, that is, a small hit is generated by right-handed in the normal game state ST1, and a small hit is made by aiming to win a small hit (to the large winning opening during the small hit period). It is possible to prevent winning a prize).

In addition, when the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, it prevents illegal winning due to capture (avoids unrecommended hitting methods). ), It was necessary to set a limit on the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the small hit game state, such as performing the short opening only once. On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 has the game ball retention function, the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38. It takes time to do it. Therefore, even if the large winning opening is opened multiple times during the small hit game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture, so that the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state can be increased. it can.

Here, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 arranged above the special variable winning device 38 does not have the game ball retention function, and arrives at the special variable winning device 38 after the game ball is launched. It takes about 2 seconds. In such a case, if the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, the pattern shown in FIG. 25 (b), that is, the pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is performed only once, the small hit Even if you aim to hit the game ball at the start of the game state, the small hit game state is finished by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38, so the game ball is in the big winning opening. I can't win a prize.

On the other hand, in such a case, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 25 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0". If the pattern is "5 seconds open state-> 1.0 seconds closed state-> 0.5 seconds open state", the small hit game state can be achieved by aiming at the start of the small hit game state and starting to hit the game ball. Since the game ball can be delivered to the special variable winning device 38 by the end of the above, the game ball can win a prize in the large winning opening. Therefore, in such a case, if an opening pattern or the like in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, it is not possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. On the other hand, as an opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, an opening pattern in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times is adopted, that is, the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit gaming state is increased. If it can be done, it is possible to improve the small hit performance (increase the number of balls to be ejected in the small hit game state), but it cannot be realized due to illegal winning by capture.

A retention device that delays the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 in order to both prevent illegal winning due to capture and improve the small hit performance (in the present embodiment). In this case, a normal variable winning device 37) or the like is provided. If the retention device delays by 2 seconds (a delay time of 2 seconds is given), it takes about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38.

As a result, the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state is, for example, a pattern as shown in FIG. 25 (c), that is, "0.5 second open state → 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state". In the case of the pattern of "→ 1.0 second closed state → 0.5 second open state", it takes 3.5 seconds (= 0.5 second + 1.0 second + 0.5 second + 1.0) until the operation of the opening / closing member 990 ends. It takes about 4 seconds from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38, whereas it takes (seconds + 0.5 seconds). That is, in the present embodiment, the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 is longer than the time from the start of operation to the end of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state. In addition, the residence time of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 can be determined according to the opening / closing pattern (opening pattern of the large winning opening) of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state.

The time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38 (this) rather than the time from the start of operation to the end of operation of the opening / closing member 990 in the small hit game state (3.5 seconds in this example). In the example, by lengthening (about 4 seconds), even if you aim to hit the game ball at the start of the small hit game state, by the time the game ball arrives at the special variable winning device 38, the small hit game The state has ended. Therefore, even if an opening pattern in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times is adopted as the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by providing a retention device or the like that gives a delay time to the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38, while preventing illegal winning due to capture. , Small hit performance can be improved. Further, the longer the delay time is, the longer the total time of the small hit game state can be extended, so that the small hit performance can be improved. Further, the longer the delay time, the longer it takes to arrive at the special variable winning device 38, so that it becomes difficult to illegally win a prize by capturing. Further, the provision of such a retention device or the like is effective not only for aiming during normal electric support but also for aiming during small hit RUSH. In addition, the longer the delay time, the more difficult it is to aim, so it is necessary to keep hitting, and stable data can be acquired even in the operation of the hall.

Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, a right-handed hit is made to win the second start winning opening 97 to generate a small hit, and then the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 and is normally used. When the figure is correct, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37, so that the game balls are arranged below the normal variable winning device 37. It is possible to make it difficult for the special variable winning device 38 to win a prize. That is, according to the present embodiment, it takes time for the game ball to arrive at the special variable winning device 38 due to the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37, so that it is possible to prevent illegal winning due to capture. Furthermore, the game ball retention function of the normal variable winning device 37 can reduce the number of game balls that fail to win the normal variable winning device 37 (it can be difficult to make the special variable winning device 38 win), so that the illegal winning by capture can be made. The damage caused by can be minimized.

In addition, by increasing the degree of freedom of the opening pattern of the large winning opening in the small hit game state, not only the small hit performance can be improved (increased ball output in the small hit game state), but also the large winning opening 38d is opened. Since it is possible to increase the number of times, the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball flows into the large winning opening 38d, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, as the time from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the special variable winning device 38, about 2 seconds when there is no retention device and about 4 seconds when there is a retention device are illustrated. The arrival time is just the average value of the measured values, and of course, there is an error in the actual arrival time.

Further, the alert (error notification) to be performed when the ball is hit right in the normal game state may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have won the second start winning opening 97 is satisfied. This may be performed when the condition that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is satisfied, or the number of game balls that have won the second start winning opening 97 and the normal number of game balls have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. This may be performed when the condition that the sum with the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as a decrease in interest and a decrease in motivation to play because the player is immediately alerted even if he accidentally hits the right side. Further, in the normal game state, the counter that counts the game balls that have won the second start winning opening 97 and the counter that counts the game balls that have passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 are configured to be cleared at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, it may be configured to update by -1 each time the first start winning opening 36 is won.

FIG. 26 shows the probabilities of big hits and small hits, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, are shown in the figures. The probability is as shown in 26 (a). In the game machine of the present embodiment, the probability state becomes high after the end of the special game state (first special game state) based on the probability variation jackpot, and when the fall lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed is won, the probability state becomes low. It is configured to be. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 26 (b). This small hit probability is higher in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate.

Further, FIG. 26 (c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in special figures 1 and 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type, and FIG. 26 (d) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in special figures 1 and 2. The possible small hit types, the opening time, the number of opening times, and the distribution probability of each small hit type are shown. It should be noted that the small hit may not be provided in the special figure 1 but may be set only in the special figure 2.

27 and 28 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 27A shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is different in the normal gaming state and the fifth specific gaming state (low probability state). In the normal gaming state, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In order for the player to proceed with the game according to this design, for Special Figure 2, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected regardless of which variation pattern is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variable time that can be determined as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 The execution of the variable display game is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the normal game state, the player is made to proceed mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, in the fifth specific game state, the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, but this is for the convenience of the player because it is confirmed that a special game state in which the game progresses by hitting right is generated. Special Figure 2 The variable display game is the main variable. In the fifth specific game state, as in the normal game state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes long, so that the occurrence of small hits can hardly be expected.

FIG. 27 (b) shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is different in the specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3, third specific game state ST4, fourth specific game state ST5). showed that. In this case, as the variation pattern without reach in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the variation pattern whose variation time is shorter than that in the normal gaming state is selected. In the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes the main variation, and the variation time is shortened as compared with the normal game state. In addition, for the special figure 2 variable display game, only the variable pan without reach can be selected. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the main variation, and the variation time is shortened as compared with the normal game state.

FIG. 28A shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the normal gaming state. With respect to the special figure 2, only the fluctuation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the normal game state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is longer than the variable time which can be selected when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit.

FIG. 28B shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. Special Figure 1 For the fluctuation display game, a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time equivalent to that of the normal gaming state is selected. Further, for the special figure 2 variable display game, a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time equivalent to the SP3 reach of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

FIG. 28 (c) shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in the third specific gaming state. Special Figure 1 A very long fluctuation time is set for the fluctuation display game. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient time after shifting to the fourth specific game state, and it is possible to secure an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the longer the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is, the more chances of small hits are generated, so that the number of prize balls that can be obtained increases, which is advantageous for the player. For this reason, it is possible to select a plurality of types of time having different lengths as the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the profits that can be obtained may differ to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game has a short variable time. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs in the third specific game state, even if the game shifts to the fourth specific game state, the small hit cannot be frequently generated, so that the big hit can be quickly made. It is designed to be derived. Since the fourth specific game state shifts when the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in the third specific game state is started, basically, the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is newly started. Since this is not the case, the fluctuation pattern when the result is a big hit in the fourth specific game state is not specified.

FIG. 28D shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in the normal gaming state and the fifth specific gaming state. With respect to the special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and the long variation in which the variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 28 (e) shows variations when the result is a small hit in the specific gaming state (first specific gaming state ST2, second specific gaming state ST3, third specific gaming state ST4, fourth specific gaming state ST5). The pattern is shown. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected.

FIG. 29 shows a special variable winning device in a special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on a big hit (first special result) and a special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on a small hit (second special result). The opening and closing pattern of is shown. When the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1. In the grand prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, the opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). After that, the rounds in which the interval period of 2000 ms and the open period of 29000 ms are set are repeated up to 10 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends. Further, when the jackpot type is a 4R probability variable jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special variable winning device 38 is opened according to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 2. This opening / closing pattern differs only in the number of rounds from the opening / closing pattern of the 10R jackpot.

The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening / closing pattern is the time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the latter half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the latter half is the ending time.

The opening / closing pattern of the small hit is a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure. Is released. In addition, in both the opening and closing patterns of big hits and small hits, if a specified number of prizes are won in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that point. The opening time of the small hit is shorter than the opening time of the big hit, and the number of winnings to the special variable winning device 38 in the special gaming state is small. Therefore, the small hit has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the big hit. That is, as the special result, a first special result (big hit) capable of generating the first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the gaming value that can be given to the player is lower than that of the first special gaming state are generated. The second special result (small hit) that is possible and is included.

Regarding the opening / closing pattern of the small hit, the lengths of the fanfare period and the ending period differ depending on whether or not the player is in the fourth specific game state, and the opening / closing pattern is made longer in the case of the fourth specific game state. In the fourth specific game state, these times are secured in order to perform effects such as notification regarding small hits and notification of the number of prize balls by winning a prize. In addition, since small hits occur frequently in the 4th specific game state, the time required to digest the special game state is lengthened by lengthening the fanfare period and the ending period so that the number of prize balls per unit time does not become too large. I have to. Further, the opening time of the special variable winning device is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the fourth specific gaming state. Here, in the opening / closing pattern of each small hit, only one opening is performed, but it is also possible to perform a plurality of opening. In this case, the interval time for temporarily closing the special variable winning device 38 is the same regardless of whether or not it is in the specific gaming state.

Although both the length of the fanfare period and the length of the ending period are different depending on whether or not the player is in the fourth specific game state, only one of them may be different. Further, with respect to the opening / closing pattern of the jackpot, one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period may be different depending on whether or not the fourth specific gaming state is reached.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. When the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, the game is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a hit (special result). When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97, and the special variable winning device 38 are either won, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97, and the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning openings is increased according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 19) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to obtain the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side of the game, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and special It is possible to aim for a prize in the variable winning device 38, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 arranged above the second starting winning opening 97.

The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a or the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as one start memory. Special Figure 1 When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 while the variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the start right is generated. Along with this, the first start memory is stored, the number of the first start memory is added by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. At this time, the first start memory is stored. The number is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit, the first start memory number is added by 1 and the first start memory is one. It will be remembered. Then, when the first special figure 1 variable display game can be started in a state where the first start memory number is 1 or more (the end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or the end of the special game state), the first The number of start memories is subtracted by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 3 switch 97a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, even if the game ball wins the second start winning opening 97, the second start memory does not occur. In addition, when the second start winning opening 97 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is temporarily generated for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be digested immediately, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random value, a jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 19). The special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as the special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times for the first start memory). Then, the stored number of the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Decorative special figure Displayed as a start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first start memory, and based on winning a prize in the second start winning opening 97, the special figure 1 display device 51 (first variable display device). The special figure 2 fluctuation display game is played on the display 2 display 52 (second fluctuation display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game of is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the general electric winning opening 37d (first starting winning area) or the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). 1 It serves as a first execution control means for controlling execution of a variable display game (first special figure variable display game). Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area). It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the first variation in which the special figure 1 display 51 can display the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Makes a display means. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97.

Further, after the end of the big hit game state (first special game state), the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and the probability of hitting is high). It is possible to control to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the game can proceed by (with support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

Further, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variation in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device 41. The display game is now running. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in which the display device 41 variablely displays the decorative identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game, but in the case of the normal game state in which the probability is low, the variable time is used as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left and aim at the first start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game. The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

Based on the above, the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (1st starting winning opening 36, 2nd starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning device 37), and the result of the game is a special result. In the game machine 10 that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player in the event of such a situation, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a special variable winning device that is opened in the special game state. (Special variable winning device 38), and the game control means includes a fanfare period, which is a period from the start of the special gaming state to the start of opening of the special variable winning device, and the last special variable winning device in the special gaming state. It is possible to set the ending period, which is the period from the end of the opening of the game to the end of the special game state, and even if the special game state is based on the same special result, when the special result is derived. It is possible to make the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different according to the game state of. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening 97 forming the starting winning opening, and the first starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variable winning device 37. The second variable display game is executed based on the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes the first variable display game based on the winning prize and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. The second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the specific game state (fourth specific game state) in which the execution time of the second variable display game is set to be shorter than the normal state can be generated. A game state generating means (game control device 100) is provided, and the game control means derives the length of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period in the special game state based on the same special result. It means that the game state when the special result is derived is longer when the game state is the specific game state than when the game state is not the specific game state. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, in the specific game state, the time for executing the effect can be secured, and in the case of not in the specific game state, the game can proceed quickly.

Further, the special result includes a first special result in which the probability of being derived can be changed according to the gaming state and a second special result in which the probability of being derived is constant regardless of the gaming state. The probability that the second special result is derived is set to be higher than the probability that the first special result is derived. Therefore, the execution mode can be set according to the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the lengths of one or both of the fanfare period and the ending period different for the second special result that does not change the probability, the derivation probability does not change, but the execution mode can be changed.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 30, first, a process for disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer, which is the start address of an area for saving values such as registers when an interrupt occurs. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not the target of the RAM validity judgment (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on to the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step X12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step X8). When the timer value is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step X13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17), and it is normal. If (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of are matched (step X20). When the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 of FIG. 31, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X25 of FIG. 31 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

In step X21 of FIG. 31, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step X22). The interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game means that when both special figure variable display games are being executed, the second special result (small hit) is derived. As a result, the other special figure variation display game is interrupted, and the special figure variation display game is interrupted in the restart control that resumes after the end of the special gaming state. If it is interrupted, the special figure 1 game interruption flag or the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set according to the interrupted special figure variation display game, and the power supply to the game machine is stopped for these flags. It is designed to retain memory even while it is being played.

If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step X22; N), the process proceeds to step X24. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (step X22; Y), the suspended command corresponding to the suspended special figure is set (step X23).

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24), and the step. Proceed to X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, and a suspended command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed, the customer is waiting. Send the command of the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X25), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are included. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X27). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X28). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)). Sends multiple commands such as (command to notify RAM initialization). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a production count information command and a support count information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with Fuden support, are also transmitted.

In step X30, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X30, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X32), interrupt is permitted (step X33). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X34) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle. Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step X34, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X35), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X34). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X34) (step X33), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step X34 also includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, both are initially used. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt, as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step X37; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X37; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X38), all. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step X39) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X40), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X41). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X42) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X43) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X44). ), And then wait for the power of the game machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is specified (step X101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105), a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) are performed to output the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and setting the prize ball, A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) is performed to monitor errors such as opening the front frame and the glass frame and illegally winning the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device 38.

Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X110) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed to end the timer interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X494). Then, in the case of the normal gaming state (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If the player is not in the normal gaming state (step X494; N), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and the effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting the holding information by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is performed (step X498).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed hit by display, voice, or the like. Right-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the specific game state or special game state, and the first start winning opening 36, which is designed so that the player cannot win unless the player is left-handed, is in the specific game state or special. When a prize is detected during the game state, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Next, the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) wins monitoring table is prepared (step X499), hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X500), and a jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97. It is determined whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning that is set in the case of (step X501).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; N), the process proceeds to step X509. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X501; Y), is the normal electric (normal variable winning device 37) operating, that is, It is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated to enable the winning of the game ball (step X502), and when the normal electric power is operating (step X502; Y), step X504 Move to. On the other hand, when the normal electric power is not operating (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the general electric power is being illegally generated (step X503).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If a normal electric power fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X509. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more. Further, when the fraudulent electric power is not occurring (step X503; N), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X504). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step X504; N), the process proceeds to step X507. Further, in the normal gaming state (step X504; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and the effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting the holding information by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), the special figure start port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the process proceeds to step X509.

Based on receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed by displaying, voice, or the like. Left-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the normal game state, and left when a prize is detected in the normal game state by the normal variable winning device 37 which is designed so that the player does not win unless the player hits right. I am trying to give a hit instruction notification.

Next, the starting port 3 (second starting winning opening 97) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X509), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X510). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information with a start opening prize that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the second start winning opening 97 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X511).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the starting opening winning information is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 97 (step X511; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step X512). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step X512; N), the process proceeds to step X515. Further, in the normal gaming state (step X512; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X513), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X514). After that, a table for setting the holding information by the start port 3 is prepared (step X515), the special figure start port 3 switch process is performed (step X516), and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

Based on receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed by displaying, voice, or the like. Left-handed is more advantageous for the player when in the normal game state, and when a prize is detected in the normal game state at the second starting winning opening 97, which is designed so that the player does not win unless the player hits right. I am trying to give a left-handed instruction notification.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 34 shows a special figure start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 1 switch process, first, the start port signal 1 output number of times, which is the number of times to output information on the number of times of winning to the first start winning opening 36 to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded. Then (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523). Then, when the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 1 output count area of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number). Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because the loop is looped by +1 update and becomes 0.

When the number of special figure 1 hold is less than the upper limit value (4 in this case) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process described later is set (step X525; Y). Step X526), the number of special figures 1 held is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared by the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is used as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the storage area (step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure hold information determination process (step X534), which is the look-ahead process, is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step X535), and the effect command setting process is performed (step X535). Step X536), the special figure start port 1 switch process is completed.

In the special figure start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process, in steps X521 to X524 regarding the start port signal, information regarding the number of times of winning the normal variable winning device 37 is provided in the game machine 10. The process is the same as that shown in FIG. 34 except that the start port signal 2 output to the external management device is processed. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the ordinary variable winning device 37, and the predetermined random number is used as the first starting memory. It serves as a first start storage means that can store up to the maximum number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process. The same processing is performed in the special drawing start port 2 switch processing (not shown). The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step X543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547). ). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X550), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), the effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, the special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Process (step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step X556), and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are the processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal processing. Is similar to.

By the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is changed to the special figure 1 variation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game is started. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means. Make a possible first decision. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

Note that this special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Further, in the case of the fourth specific gaming state, the pre-reading process may not be performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is the main body during the fourth specific game state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly derived by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped as a result of the loss. In other words, since most of them are out of order, there is not much meaning in notifying the look-ahead result, and after notifying the look-ahead result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is forcibly changed to the out-of-reading result. This is because there may be a contradiction.

However, since the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate the start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure is as long as the first start memory is available during the first period of the fourth specific game state. There is a high possibility that only one variable display game will be played, and in such a case, a look-ahead effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memory that performs such a look-ahead effect, the one that occurred before the start of the fourth specific game state is pre-reading, and the result is used to generate it after the start of the fourth specific game state. For those that have been made, the look-ahead processing is performed for those that are the target of such look-ahead effect. Of course, the look-ahead process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead process in another process.

[Special figure start port 3 switch processing]
FIG. 36 shows a special figure start port 3 switch process (step X516) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 3 switch process, first, the start port signal 3 output number of times, which is the number of times to output information on the number of times of winning to the second start winning opening 97 to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded. Then (step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563). Then, when the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 3 output count area of the RWM (step X564), and the start port 3 (second start winning port 97) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

The start opening 3 winning invalidity means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during processing during special figure display described later), during the first or second special game state, and Special Figure 2 The variable display game is being executed. When the start port 3 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special figure start port 3 switch process is terminated. If the starting port 3 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the number of special figures 2 held is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure start port 3 switch processing is completed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning prize storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second start winning opening 97. Since there are few types of fluctuation patterns in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is not used.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 game processing (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. Special Figure 1 Variable display Controls the entire process related to the game and sets the display of Special Figure 1. In this special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption interruption flag, which is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, is set (step Y100). When the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 Performs processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game in steps Y101 to Y118. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Y119. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In step Y101, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being the big hit or the small hit. (Step Y101). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y101; N). Step Y103). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is monitored, and the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening. Performs processing to set the winning opening count command and processing to close the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). Special Figure 1 If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The game sequence branch table referred to in FIG. 1 is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 1 Ordinary processing (step Y108) is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y109).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 1 display processing (step Y110) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y112) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special figure 1 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit middle processing is performed. Performs the small hit fanfare process (step Y115) for setting the information necessary for. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y116) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining sphere process (step Y117) for setting the information necessary for the process is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed to perform the special figure 1 fluctuation control process. FIG. 1 The game process ends. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 game processing (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. This special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 interruption interruption flag, which is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, is set (step Y130). When the special figure 2 interruption flag is not set (step Y130; N), that is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y131, and the subsequent special figure 2 Performs processing related to the variable display game. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 interruption flag is set (step Y130; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 variation display game of steps Y131 to Y151. Is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Y152. As a result, while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In step Y131, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit / small hit, that is, in the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being the big hit or the small hit. (Step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y131; N). Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is monitored, and the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening. Performs processing to set the winning opening count command and processing to close the winning opening when a specified number of winnings are received in the large winning opening. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). Special Figure 2 If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The fluctuation timer value (60,000 ms in this case) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of small hits in the normal game state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for the specified time (here, 60,000 ms).

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is acquired using the table (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game processing number is performed (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game are set. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations Fig. 2 Normal processing (step Y139) is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y140).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type The special figure 2 display processing (step Y141) for setting the fanfare time according to the large winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, or the special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", the special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y145) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Performs the small hit fanfare process (step Y146) for setting the information necessary for. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining sphere processing (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed to perform the special figure 2 fluctuation control process. FIG. 2 The game processing is finished. This special figure 2 game process performs a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the special figure 1 game processing described above for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel in.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y108) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 is not normally executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

If the special figure 1 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been notified, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (step Y202; N), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether or not the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the second specific game state ends, so that the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). , Perform the effect command setting process (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any of 0 to 5 is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on the jackpot. The special figure status 5 indicates that the game is in the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213). Then, when the player is in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the player is not in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y213; N), the special figure 1 variation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a state other than the fourth specific game state, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is displayed during the period when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation. It is possible to confirm the execution of the game. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 is not normally executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special figure 2 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the special figure 2 variable display game when the second start winning opening 97 is won in a state where the game can be started. Special figure 2 This is temporarily generated to perform the start processing of the variable display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 changing is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal gaming state (step Y227). Then, when the player is not in the normal gaming state (step Y227; N), the process proceeds to step Y230. Further, in the case of the normal gaming state (step Y227; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started during the period when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes irregular fluctuation. As a result, it can be confirmed that the player intentionally executes the special figure 2 variation display game in which the variation is irregular. After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233), and when it has not been disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs processing related to settings. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y231; N), when special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demo has already started (step Y233; Y). , Step Y237.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y234), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and the effect is produced. The command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the game state information, so that an appropriate effect cannot be performed. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. This makes it possible to return to the effect according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the game state to be transmitted. The customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process. This special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, a fall lottery process for drawing a transition from a high probability state to a normal probability state is performed (step Y239), and a support management process for managing a period for setting a normal probability state is performed (step Y240). Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is lost. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting information, jackpot information, or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 1 Information setting process (step Y244) is performed, and a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step Y245).

After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after that, a process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly removed regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it ends. In particular, since there is a high probability that the special figure 2 variable display game will be a small hit, if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, there is a high possibility that such processing will be performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. .. Therefore, for example, even though the special figure 1 variable display game is producing a highly expected effect, the game is forcibly stopped due to a disengagement result, and the player feels distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to start, measures such as preventing the production with high expectations from being selected are taken. I am trying to do it.

For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in the fourth specific game state (step Y248), and if the player is in the fourth specific game state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the fourth specific game state, the game is progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and the game is executed frequently, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped as a result of disconnection. , Special Figure 1 In the variable display game, since it is set in advance so that the effect with high expectation is not selected, no special processing is performed here.

Further, when the player is not in the fourth specific gaming state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249). When the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y249; N), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is a very long variable time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, no processing is performed here to prevent a highly expected effect from being selected.

When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y249; Y), it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is out of order (step Y250), and when the result is out of order (step Y250; Y). ) Goes to step Y257. In this case, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped. Further, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is not out of alignment (step Y250; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier. Therefore, in order to prevent the production with high expectation from being selected. No processing is performed.

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 variation display to be executed from now on is calculated. It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the game is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends first, no processing is performed to prevent the production having a high expectation from being selected.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256), a fourth specific game state setting process for setting a fourth specific game state is performed (step Y257), and special figure 1 variation starts. End the process. This command also includes information on whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit. Based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the effect control device 300 regulates the selection of the effect with high expectation for the special figure 1 variation display game or performs a specific execution. Processing such as setting the mode is performed.

When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of resetting the information related to the fluctuation pattern (first and second half fluctuation pattern numbers, etc.) may be performed so that the effect control device 300 changes to the variation pattern that does not select the effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process of preparing the command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern processing (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100 determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal game state, and is performed in the second variation display game. It serves as a first variation mode determining means capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Further, the process of resetting the above variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means, the second variation display game. Is being executed, the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation mode information of the second fluctuation display game is referred to, and information on the fluctuation pattern is obtained without changing the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game that has been determined. It serves as a second variation mode determining means that can be redetermined.

Further, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). Special Figure 1 The variation time of the variation display game is determined from the beginning by performing the process (step Y254) of determining whether the variation time of the variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the variation display game. You may do so.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process. This special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, a fall lottery process for drawing a transition from a high-probability state to a normal-probability state is performed (step Y259), and a support management process for managing the period for setting the Fuden support is performed (step Y260). Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is lost. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting information, jackpot information, or small hit information is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 2 Perform the information setting process (step Y264), and prepare the special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. (Step Y265).

After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The process (step Y267) is performed, the fourth specific game state setting process for setting the fourth specific game state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

Note that the special figure 2 variation start process does not perform a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, so that the special figure 2 variable display game is less likely to be forcibly ended with a missed result. However, as in the case of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of a highly expected effect may be restricted.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 43 shows a fall lottery process (steps Y239, Y259) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process. In this fall lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y581), and if the probability is not high (step Y581; N), the fall lottery process is terminated. Further, when the probability is high (step Y581; Y), a fall lottery random number is acquired (step Y582), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery is won by referring to the determination value (step Y583).

If the fall lottery has not been won (step Y583; N), the fall lottery process ends. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. Further, when the fall lottery is won (step Y583; Y), a process for shifting to the low probability state is performed. First, the signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal is set to OFF. Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). As a result, the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery is set to a low probability state.

Next, the process of terminating Fuden support is performed. In addition, when the fall lottery is won, the Fuden support is terminated when the fall lottery is won in the third specific game state. First, it is determined whether or not the normal electric power support is in progress (step Y588), and if the general electric power support is not in progress (step Y588; N), the fall lottery process ends. Further, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y588; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is 0 (step Y589).

When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y589; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (in the case of the first specific game state). , The second specific game state is entered and the normal electric support is continued, so the fall lottery process is completed. In addition, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y589; Y), that is, the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game is executed from the end of the special game state, but the third is not won in the fall lottery. If it is in the specific game state, a process of terminating the normal electric support after step Y590 is performed in order to shift to the normal game state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y590). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y591). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure low probability and no time saving number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y592), and the special figure low probability and no support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y593). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y594), and the fall lottery process is completed. As a result, it becomes a low probability state and a state without normal electric support, and shifts to a normal game state. Information on the end of the high-probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on this information.

[Support management process]
FIG. 44 shows the support management processing (steps Y240, Y260) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this support management process, it is first determined whether or not the support is being supported (step Y1521), and if the support is not being supported (step Y1521; N), the support management process is terminated. In addition, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y1521; Y), if the number of times of support for managing the execution number of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is not 0, the support is updated by -1 (step Y1522). It is determined whether the number of times is 0 (step Y1523).

When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1523; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (first specific game state or second specific). If the game state continues), the support management process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1523; Y), that is, when the special figure variation display game exceeding the specified number (here, 100 times) is started from the end of the special game state, or when the special game state is already in the special game state. If the special figure variation display game exceeding the specified number is executed from the end but the third specific game state is reached without winning the fall lottery, it is determined whether the game is in the high probability state (step Y1524).

In the case of the high probability state (step Y1524; Y), the support management process is terminated because the transition to the third specific gaming state or the third specific gaming state continues. If the probability is not high (step Y1524; N), a process of terminating the normal electric support after step Y1525 is performed in order to end the second specific gaming state and shift to the normal gaming state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the end of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1525). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1526). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure low probability and no time saving number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1527), and the special figure low probability and no support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1528). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y1529), the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y1530), and the left-handed instruction notification is given at the start of the next special figure variation display game, and the support management process is performed. To finish. As a result, the second specific gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 45 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y275), and if it is a jackpot (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and if it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. (Step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 47 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps Y276, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery of the big hit was lost. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). When the probability is not high (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 48 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target large hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). A small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, when it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the determination is for the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step Y322).

Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y322; N), that is, when the judgment is about the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). , It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 1 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y338). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and when it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 1. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and prepare the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and the effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step Y361), and if it is a jackpot (step Y361; Y), the jackpot symbol random number is stored from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2 Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y368). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and when it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 2. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and prepare the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and the effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 displays the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means of the first variation display game. It serves as the first decision-making means that can be decided before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And, it serves as a second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning opening 97 fires on the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and is in a normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is larger than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set the detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time elapses. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, is off or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the variation is set. The information about the time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, but a command indicating only the long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on receiving the stop command. To do so. In this way, the burden of control on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[4th specific game state setting process]
FIG. 51 shows the fourth specific game state setting process (steps Y257, Y268) performed in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process. In this fourth specific game state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric power support is in progress (step Y1501), and if the general electric power support is not in progress (step Y1501; N), the fourth specific game state setting process ends. To do. Further, when the normal power support is in progress (step Y1501; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be the normal power support is 0 (step Y1502).

When the number of times of support is not 0 (step Y1502; N), that is, when the specified number (here, 100 times) of the special figure variation display game has not been executed since the end of the special game state (first specific game state or second specific). In the case of a game state), the fourth specific game state setting process is terminated. In addition, when the number of times of support is 0 (step Y1502; Y), that is, a specified number (here, 100 times) of special figure variation display games are executed from the end of the special game state, but the third is not won in the fall lottery. When the game is in the specific game state, it is determined whether the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503).

If the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is not a big hit (step Y1503; N), the third specific game state continues, so the fourth specific game state setting process ends. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game started this time is a big hit (step Y1503; Y), a process of terminating the normal electric support after step Y1504 is performed in order to shift to the fourth specific game state.

In the process of terminating the normal power support, first, the signal related to the end of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1504). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1505). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Then, the special figure high probability and no time saving number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1506), and the special figure high probability and no support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1507). After that, the low probability of the normal figure is set (step Y1508), the fourth specific game state flag is saved (step Y1509), and the fourth specific game state setting process is completed. As a result, the state becomes a high probability state and there is no general electric support, and the state shifts to the fourth specific game state setting.

The fourth specific game state flag is a flag set to make it possible to recognize that the fourth specific game state is present, and is cleared when the special game state starts. Since this 4th specific game state flag is not cleared even if the fall lottery is won during the 4th specific game state and the game shifts to the 5th specific game state, the game state has a low probability of falling due to the fall during the 4th specific game state. It is possible to recognize that the player is in the fifth specific game state even if the player is in a state and there is no general electric support.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during change Transition setting processing]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Further, the initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

The initial value set in the symbol number area during special figure 1 fluctuation is 0, and the fluctuation display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation Transition setting processing]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process. In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, the initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

Special figure 2 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, and the fluctuation display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is assumed that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variation display is started from at least the state in which the segment is lit. You may try to do it. In addition, the variable display may be started from the state where the same segment is always lit each time. Further, the lighting mode when the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 start the fluctuation may be the same or different.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y623).

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. .. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y627). If it is out of the special figure 1 (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. Further, if the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y643. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y629). ). If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y629; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (step Y640), and the decorative special figure 2 interruption command is set. (Step Y641), the effect command setting process (step Y642) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y643.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a small hit. It should be noted that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y629; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 display process is in progress (step Y630). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y632. If the special figure 2 is not being processed during display (step Y630; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y631), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y632). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y633), the decorative special figure 2 off symbol command is set and prepared (step Y634), and the symbol command is sent to the decorative special figure 2 command area. Save (step Y635) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y636). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y643), and whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y644). In the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; Y), the process proceeds to step Y647. If it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y644; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y645). ), Special figure 1 Loads information from the large winning opening opening information area and saves it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y646).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y647), the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y648), and the special figure 1 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y653).

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). Here, the display time is set to 600 ms in the case of a miss, 2000 ms in the case of a big hit, and 136 ms in the case of a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y657). If it is out of the special figure 2 (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Further, if the special figure 2 is not out of alignment (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; Y), the process proceeds to step Y673. Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit or the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the special figure 1 interruption command is set. (Step Y671), the effect command setting process (step Y672) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y673.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y660). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 2 variable display game having a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y660; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the process proceeds to step Y663.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), the decorative special figure 1 off symbol command is set and prepared (step Y664), and the symbol command is sent to the decorative special figure 1 command area. Save (step Y665) and perform the effect command setting process (step Y666). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and whether the special figure 2 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y674). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. If it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675). ), Special figure 2 Load information from the large winning opening opening information area and save it in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y676).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y678), and the special figure 2 is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y648) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuations Transition setting processing 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuations Transition setting processing 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1 (step Y704).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and the information for obtaining the loss result is set below. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 59 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2 (step Y724).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and the information for obtaining the loss result is set below. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y730), the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated. ..

By the above processing of FIGS. 54 to 59, when one of the special figure variation display games becomes the first special result (big hit), the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with the disengagement result. Become. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. Based on this, the second end control process is performed in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of disconnection.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has the first special result, the first variation that performs the execution control. It is possible to end the display game as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means is the first variable display game execution control means when the execution control of the second variable display game is performed. When the first variable display game whose execution is controlled by is the first special result, the second variable display game whose execution control is performed can be terminated as a result other than the special result. It will be. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variable display game, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with the off result, so that a problem does not occur even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed. Can be.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
60 and 61 show the process during display of the special figure 1 (step Y110) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag 1 is loaded. Clear one area (step Y752).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 area is loaded (step Y753) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether the jackpot is a jackpot, that is, whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is jackpot information (step Y755), and if it is not a jackpot (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned ON, the accessory continuous operating device is operated) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variation display game. The middle signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y759), the round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special diagram 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y770), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening (step Y771). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, when the big hit flag 1 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). Then, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), a command is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y783), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y787).

When not in the normal gaming state (step Y787; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing a right-handed strike is made.

After that, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y793), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting is set. The process (step Y797) is performed, and the process during display of special figure 1 is terminated.

If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806). FIG. 1 Normally, the process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the process during display of the special figure 1 is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
62 and 63 show the process during display of the special figure 2 (step Y141) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. It should be noted that this special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is flagged. Clear two regions (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 region is loaded (step Y813) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether the jackpot is a jackpot, that is, whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is jackpot information (step Y815), and if it is not a jackpot (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. Further, in the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device is operated) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variation display game. The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y817), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y819), the round number upper limit value (10 or 4 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special diagram 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the area of the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step Y830), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the illegal monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening (step Y831). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is the small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area to prepare (step Y843), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (step Y847).

When not in the normal gaming state (step Y847; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, in the normal gaming state (step Y847; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game status display unit 56 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, the area for the number of illegal prizes in the large prize opening is cleared (step Y853), the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting is made. The process (step Y857) is performed, and the process during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

Further, when it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y866). FIG. 2 Normally, the process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the process during display of the special figure 2 is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the second special result of the variable display game as well as the means. Eggplant.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 64 describes in detail the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display processing and special drawing 2 display processing. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, the signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are set.

Next, the jackpot information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the game state display number 2 area is in the right-handed state. Save the number (step Y881).

After that, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process is completed. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information related to the abnormal change in Special Figure 2 is cleared.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893). Here, referring to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of not in the specific gaming state. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903). Here, referring to the current gaming state, 1000 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of the specific gaming state, and 4 ms is set as the small hit fanfare time in the case of not in the specific gaming state. Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 67 shows the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111, Y142) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y951), the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y952), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y953).

Next, the jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). Then, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, 29000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The opening time of the big winning opening is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

Then, the signal relating to the opening start of the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y963). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y964), and the large winning opening is counted. The number of mouth counts is cleared (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 68 shows the processing during opening of the large winning opening (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this processing while the winning opening is open, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and the effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. Further, in the case of the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is prepared. I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, when it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y1015). After that, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
FIG. 69 shows the large winning opening residual ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y1041).

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal relating to the end of opening the large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and the fanfare / processing during the interval 3 is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time and the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period is 2000 ms, and in this interval period, the interval effect is produced by the display device 41 or the like. Will be executed.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), the jackpot end processing transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step). Y1046), 6 related to the special figure 1 big hit end process or the special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048). In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step). Y1050), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is the period from the end of the final round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time and the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the end time. For example, in the case of the special figure 1 large winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms, and in this ending period, the ending effect is produced by the display device 41 or the like. Will be executed.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 70 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 71 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In the special figure 1 big hit end process, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1104). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1105), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1106), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1106). Y1108). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1109).

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end process is used to start the special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 game processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1109, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt. That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

Next, it is determined whether the special result is a probability variation jackpot (step Y1110), and if it is a probability variation jackpot (step Y1110; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the variation time shortening state of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1111). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1112). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, the number with high probability and time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1114), and the special figure high probability and support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1116). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1117), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, here) is set to the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is not a probability variation jackpot (step Y1110; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signals relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state are saved in the external information output data area (step Y1119). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1120). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, the number with low probability and time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1122), and the special figure low probability and support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1124). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1125), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1127), and the initial value (here, here) is set to the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1128), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is completed.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 72 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 big hit end process is the same process except that step Y1109 in the above special figure 1 big hit process is not performed. First, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y1131), and the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1132).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1133). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1134). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1135), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1136), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1136). Y1138). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether the special result is a probability variation jackpot (step Y1110), and if it is a probability variation jackpot (step Y1139; Y), a process of setting a high probability state is performed. In this process, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the variation time shortening state of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1140). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1141). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, the number with high probability and time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1143), and the special figure high probability and support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1145). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1146), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, here) is set to the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is not a probability variation jackpot (step Y1139; N), a process of setting a low probability state is performed. In this process, first, the signals related to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state are saved in the external information output data area (step Y1148). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued. Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1149). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high probability state signal are set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to ON.

Next, the number with low probability and time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1151), and the special figure low probability and support flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153). Further, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1154), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1156), and the initial value (here, here) is set to the number of times of support for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for setting the normal electric support. (Value corresponding to 100 times) is saved (step Y1157), and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is completed.

By these special figure 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, the first specific gaming state with high probability state and general electric support is set after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation big hit. In addition, after the end of the special game state based on the normal jackpot, a second specific game state with a low probability state and a general electric support is set. That is, the probability setting that the game control device 100 can set the probability that the result of the game becomes the first special result among the special results is higher than the low probability state after the end of the special game state. Make a means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare intermediate processing (steps Y115, Y146) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in this small hit fanfare processing, first, a small hit opening command is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1202). Next, the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1203). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to ON. Then, the large winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1204), and the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1205).

After that, 8 related to the small hit middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y1206), and it is determined whether the small hit type is the small hit 1 (step Y1207). When the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1207; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1208), and the small hit opening time 1 (here, 48 ms) is set in special figure 1. Save in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and end the processing during the small hit fanfare.

If the small hit type is not 1 small hit (step Y1207; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1210), and the opening time corresponding to the small hit type is set to the special figure 2 game. The game is saved in the processing timer area (step Y1211), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed. The opening time corresponding to the small hit type is set to 1000 ms for the small hit 2, 1200 ms for the small hit 3, and 1600 ms for the small hit 4.

[Small hit medium processing]
FIG. 74 shows the small hit medium processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1243), and 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244).

After that, it is determined whether the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245). When the small hit type is small hit 1 (step Y1245; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1246), and the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is specified. FIG. 1 Save in the game processing timer area (step Y1209), and end the small hit middle processing.

When the small hit type is not 1 small hit (step Y1245; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1248), and the small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type is set. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (step Y1249), and end the small hit middle processing. The small hit remaining ball processing time corresponding to the small hit type is set to 600 ms in the case of the small hit 2 and 800 ms in the case of the small hit 3 or 4.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
FIG. 75 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y1271). In the case of the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 related to the special figure 1 small hit end process is set as the processing number (step Y1272), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If it is not a small hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 related to the special Figure 2 small hit process is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special Figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

Regardless of which of the small hits of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the small hit ending time is set (steps Y1274, Y1277) with reference to the current gaming state, and if it is a specific gaming state, the small hit ending 1200 ms or 1400 ms is set as the time, and 100 ms is set as the small hit ending time when not in the specific gaming state. As a result, the length of the ending period including the remaining ball processing time and the ending time is 2000 ms in the specific game state, and 700 ms or 900 ms in the non-specific game state.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory operating signal is set to OFF. Further, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 76 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1306). ). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal game state (step Y1307), and if the player is not in the normal game state (step Y1307; N), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Further, in the normal gaming state (step Y1307; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1310).

When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1310; N), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is set as the special figure 2 game wait time value. The value corresponding to (here, 2) is saved (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is completed. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1310; Y), the decorative special figure 2 restart command is prepared (step Y1311), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1312). After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), the value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is saved as the special figure 2 game wait time value (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 End the small hit end process.

As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition, by saving a value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value, the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. FIG. 1 The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 77 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the player is in the normal game state (step Y1337), and if the player is not in the normal game state (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. Further, in the normal gaming state (step Y1337; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), the decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1342). After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device 100 is operated by the variable display game execution control means of either the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game of is performed, and the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, one of the variable display games is played. It serves as a restart control means capable of executing restart control for resuming one of the variable display games that was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game was interrupted.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 78 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are enabled (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, the reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes the command from the game control device 100 and responds to it is performed, and the effect display editing process (step C13) that edits the setting and drawing command for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44, a board effect setting process (step C20) for controlling the effect, and a process for clearing the WDT (step C8). ) Return.

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 79 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is non-zero (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 80 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when the MODE determines that the range of the symbol-based command is within the range (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, and a model specification command. Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 81 shows a variable command process (step C236) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol system command processing.

When this special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special symbol type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are changed. It is determined whether there is an inconsistency (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variable command process ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 10R jackpot symbol, a 4R jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol. The case where the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent is when the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received, but the symbol command of the 10R jackpot symbol is received. It means that the combination is inconsistent (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, the variation effect setting process for setting the information for performing the effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, "during special figure change" means that special figure is changing (during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or not during fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing is terminated.

[Variable effect setting process]
FIG. 82 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is reachless variation (step C381). When the variation pattern type is non-reach variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code and special figure type and the effect mode at that time is set (step C382). The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and is naturally different depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, and the like. Further, each mode is provided with a plurality of modes in which the distribution rate of the advance notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different.

Next, with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of MODE and special figure type is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of non-reach variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change according to the number of reservations. After that, a lottery for notices appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice distribution group table (step C386).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the fluctuation pattern type is acquired by referring to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C385), and the first half is changing using the first half notice distribution group table. The notice lottery that appears in is performed (step C386).

Next, a lottery will be drawn for the notice production of the latter half fluctuation. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a variation display in a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of multiple columns of the special figure is a big hit). Is stopped and the variable display is displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and during the second half fluctuation (during reach) using the second half notice distribution group table. A lottery for the notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, the production and notice of the variation time of the decoration special figure variation display game and the main reach contents will be determined. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.), notice content, and game state of the special figure variation display game (step C392).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). By these processes, it becomes possible to execute the effect and the advance notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. After that, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to reduce the decorative start memory display in response to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure variation display game.

Then, the sound number which is the BGM number, the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of the effect by the decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C396), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of the identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. The display is set (step C397). Further, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (step C398). , Ends the variable effect setting process.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 83 shows a one-shot command process in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this one-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the model designation command including the information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), the model setting process for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and the single-shot command process is performed. To finish.

If it is determined in step C261 that the MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determine (step C263). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, the scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is given a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery process is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized, and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect at the time of power failure recovery.

If it is determined in step C265 that the MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). Then, when it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demo process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demo, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting effect.

Further, when it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is on hold in FIG. 1 (step C269). Then, when the MODE is in the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the single-shot command processing is terminated. Further, in step C269, when it is determined that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), the MODE determines whether the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, when the MODE is on hold in Special Figure 2 (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing processing corresponding to the generated hold is performed (step C272), and the single-shot command processing is completed. To do. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for displaying a start memory notification display that displays information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

Further, in step C271, when MODE is not on hold in FIG. 2 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C273). Then, when MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), the probability information setting process for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C273, when MODE is not probability information (step C273; N), MODE determines whether it is an error / invalidity (step C275). Then, when the MODE is an error / invalid (step C275; Y), the error / invalid setting process for performing the corresponding process such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the error / illegal setting process (step C276), a notification process when a command related to an error or an error is received, a warning display process when a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command is received, and the like are performed. ..

Further, in step C275, when MODE is not an error / invalidity (step C275; N), MODE determines whether or not the effect mode is switched (step C277). Then, when the MODE is the effect mode switching (step C277; Y), the effect mode switching process for switching the effect mode is performed (step C278), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Further, in step C277, when MODE is not the effect mode switching (step C277; N), MODE determines whether the symbol is stopped (step C279). Then, when MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot command processing is terminated. Further, when the MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C280). In the determination of whether or not the command is normal, for example, it is determined whether or not the target of the decorative special figure stop command is the target of the currently changing special figure.

Then, if the command is not normal (step C280; N), the one-shot command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure stop setting is made (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 84 shows the jackpot command process (step C238) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process. In this jackpot command process, first, MODE determines whether or not it is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When the MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process is performed such as setting a fanfare display image according to a big hit type and a small hit, and adding a value of a continuous number display unit 96. (Step C402), the P machine state is set during fanfare (step C403), and the jackpot command processing is completed.

If the MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. Then, when the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the round number display information or the like is performed (step C405), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C406). End the jackpot command processing.

If the MODE is not a round (step C404; N), the MODE determines if it is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to the interval between rounds. Then, when MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), the interval effect setting process for setting the effect during the interval is performed (step C408), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminate system command processing. If the MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

When the MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect at the end of the big hit or the small hit is performed (step C411), and the P machine state is set during the ending (step). C412), the jackpot command processing is terminated. If the MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a large winning opening count command based on winning a prize in the special variable winning device.

If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the jackpot command process ends. When the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), the count effect setting process (step C414) for setting the effect corresponding to the winning of the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the jackpot command process is completed.

By the processing in the effect control device 300 as described above, the effect according to the effect state as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the effect display in the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 24, and the like are performed. ..

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the distribution of the fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game which is a big hit started in the third specific game state ST4.

In this modified example, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 85 is distributed instead of the variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the third specific gaming state shown in FIG. 28 (c). In the distribution of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 85, the distribution is made different depending on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game executed after the end of the special game state.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the case of the 101st to 150th games after the end of the special gaming state, that is, within 50 games from the start of the third specific gaming state, the shortest variation time is 150,000 ms. The fluctuation pattern is selected at the highest rate. Further, as shown in FIG. 85B, when it is the 151st to 200th games after the end of the special gaming state, that is, when it is the 51st to 100th games from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is the second. The short variation pattern of 250,000 ms is selected at the highest rate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), when it is the 201st to 250th games after the end of the special gaming state, that is, when it is the 101st to 250th games from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is the third. The short variation pattern of 300,000 ms is selected at the highest rate. Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), when it is the 251st game or later after the end of the special gaming state, that is, when it is 251 games or more from the start of the third specific gaming state, the fluctuation time is 450,000 ms, which is the longest. The fluctuation pattern is selected at the highest rate.

That is, the larger the number of games executed in the third specific game state, the higher the ratio of selecting a long fluctuation time. The longer the fluctuation time is selected, the longer the stay period in the 4th specific game state becomes, and the more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, even though the probability is high, the big hit is not derived for a long period of time. The more profits can be given to the player. This makes it possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the jackpot is not derived. On the contrary, it is possible to have a hobby that is not found in conventional gaming machines, which is expected to keep the fitted state for a long period of time.

The distribution shown in FIG. 85 is an example, and the division of the number of games for changing the table, the distribution of the fluctuation time in each table, and the like can be arbitrarily set. In order to achieve the above-mentioned effect, it is sufficient to increase the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the longer the staying time in the third specific gaming state is, the larger the hit. For example, the longer the cumulative value of the execution time of the special figure variation display game executed in the third specific game state, the higher the selection ratio of the long variation time for the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit.

On the contrary, the longer the staying time (the number of games and the execution time) in the third specific gaming state, the lower the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who was able to derive the special result at an early stage. Further, the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time may be the highest for the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit when the staying time in the third specific game state is within a predetermined range. For example, the selection ratio of the long fluctuation time may be the highest for the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit when the game is 101 to 250 games from the start of the third specific game state. Further, a plurality of such periods may be provided. In this way, an advantageous period and an unfavorable period can be provided in the third specific gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game. In a game machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) that controls the game and the start winning opening are formed. 1 Starting winning opening 36, forming a starting winning opening, can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and the right to execute the variable display game is generated by winning. A possible normal variable winning device 37 and a second starting winning opening that forms a starting winning opening arranged at a position on the downstream side of the normal variable winning device 37 where a winning can be made via a route that can win the normal variable winning device. A mouth 97 is provided, and the control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 to either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. The probability state in which the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is set to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state, and the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning is set. The first variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the device 37, and the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time. In the high probability state, the execution time of the variable display game is shorter than that in the low probability state, and the special result depends on the gaming state. There are a first special result in which the derived probability can be changed and a second special result in which the derived probability is constant regardless of the game state, and the second special result in the second variable display game is derived. The probability of being played is set to be higher than the probability that the first special result is derived, and when the result of the variable display game becomes the first special result, the first special gaming state is set as a special gaming state advantageous to the player. Is executed, and when the result of the variable display game becomes the second special result, the second special game state is executed as a special game state advantageous to the player, and the high probability state and the second operation state are obtained. When executing a variable display game that has a special result, the game shifts to the first operating state, and the execution time of the variable display game is selected according to the number of times the variable display game has been executed since the end of the previous special gaming state. It means that I tried to do it. Therefore, the profit given to the player can be made different according to the number of times the variable display game is executed from the end of the special game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machine of this modified example has a different transition of the game state.

FIG. 86 shows the transition of the gaming state in this modified example. In this modification, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a special result. Shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5. Then, when the fall lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the probability variation jackpot is derived in the fourth specific gaming state ST5, the transition to the first specific gaming state ST2 is performed after the special gaming state, and when the normal jackpot is derived, the second specific gaming state is derived after the special gaming state. It is designed to move to ST3.

FIG. 87 shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 of this modified example. FIG. 87 (a) shows the fluctuation pattern of the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order and the fall lottery is not won, and FIG. 87 (b) shows the case where the result is a small hit and the fall lottery is won. It is a fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game that does not win. In both cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal game state. Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the same fluctuation time is set and a common specific effect is provided for the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is out of order or a small hit and the fall lottery is won. Will be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (d), for the special figure variable display game in which the result is a big hit, 20000 ms is set for the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is irregular, if the fall lottery is not won. It is set, and 10000 ms is set when the fall lottery is won, and a specific effect common to the case where the fall lottery is won is set when the result is out of order or a small hit. In addition, for the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main fluctuation, 10000 ms is set regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won, and it is common to the case where the fall lottery is won when the result is missed or a small hit. A specific effect is set.

The variation time of the special figure variation display game won in this fall lottery is shorter than the variation time of the special figure variation display game (see FIG. 28), which is a big hit in the normal game state ST1. Therefore, when the special figure change display game won in the fall lottery starts first or at the same time, the special figure change display game won in the fall lottery always ends first. As a result, at least when the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is started first or at the same time, the production content can be determined without referring to the fluctuation time of both special figure fluctuation display games, and the processing is easy. Can be.

Since the fall lottery is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern is determined after that, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game won in the fall lottery in FIGS. 87 (c) and 87 (d). Strictly speaking, it is a fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the normal game state ST1, but it will be described as a fluctuation pattern in the fourth specific game state ST5 for easy understanding.

88 and 89 show the execution mode of the effect when the fourth specific game state ST5 ends. FIG. 88A shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of order. In the state of the fourth specific game state ST5, the small hit RUSH effect is set. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game (t71, t72). Further, when the small hit is derived with a high probability (t73), the second special gaming state is reached (t73 to t76), and the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t74 to t75). Will be.

Then, when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the fall lottery is won, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t76), and the game state is set to the normal game state ST1. A fixed time (10000 ms in this case) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery (t76 to t77), and the first specific effect is performed during the execution of this special figure variation display game. After the end of this special figure variation display game, the normal mode production corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is performed (t78).

In addition, the continuous number display unit 96 maintains the state of displaying the number of big hits (here, 3 times) until the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery ends, and the special figure variation display game With the end, the display ends and the number of big hits is cleared to 0. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. , The display ends with the end of the special figure variation display game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fact that the fall lottery has been won first.

Further, in the game machine of this modified example, in the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained even if the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in the special figure variation display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and the right-handed instruction notification is also maintained (t76 to t78). Further, since the state in which the game is advanced by right-handed is maintained, the left-handed instruction notification command is not transmitted even if the second start winning opening 97 is won during this period. It should be noted that the left-handed instruction notification command may be transmitted even in the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery, and the effect control device 300 may not give the left-handed instruction during this period.

Then, when the special figure variation display game ends (t78), the first game state display unit 56 is turned off according to the game state, and the right-handed instruction notification also ends. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fact that the fall lottery has been won by the display of the first game status display unit 56, the right-handed instruction notification, and the left-handed instruction notification at an early stage, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

FIG. 88 (b) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t81), and the game state is normal. The game state is ST1. A fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit (t81 to t82). During the execution of this special figure variation display game, the first specific effect is performed (t81 to t83). Then, after the end of this special figure variation display game, the first special game state is set and the first special game production is performed (t83). If the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a fixed time (10000 ms here) is set as the variable time regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won, and the first specific effect is executed. ..

In addition, the continuous number display unit 96 maintains a state in which the number of big hits (here, 3 times) up to that point is displayed until the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery ends. In this example, since the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the number of big hits is updated by +1 with the end of the special figure variation display game. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. To. Furthermore, in this case, since the jackpot is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery and the start condition for the specific period is satisfied, the number of jackpots before the transition to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and added as a specific case. I try to do. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained even if the normal game state ST1 is entered. Therefore, in the special figure variation display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and the right-handed instruction notification is also maintained (t81 to t82). Further, even if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed. In this example, the result is a special result, which is the first special game state in which the game is advanced by right-handed striking. Therefore, the first game state display unit 56 and the right-handed striking instruction notification are maintained even after the special figure variation display game ends. Will remain.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fact that the fall lottery has been won by the display of the first game status display unit 56, the right-handed instruction notification, and the left-handed instruction notification at an early stage, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented. In addition, if the player returns to the left-handed hit, the start of the right-handed hit in the first special game state may be delayed and the start of winning the special variable winning device 38 may be delayed, but the game proceeds with the right-handed hit. By maintaining the state, it is possible to prevent the start of winning the special variable winning device 38 from being delayed.

FIG. 89A shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t91), and the game state is normal. The game state is ST1. A fixed time (here, 10000 ms) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure fluctuation display game that has won the fall lottery (t91 to t92). During the execution of this special figure variation display game, the first specific effect is performed (t91 to t93). When the special figure variation display game ends, the second special game state is set (t93), but the first specific effect is continued even in this second special game state (t93 to t94). After that, the normal mode is set with the end of the second special gaming state (t94).

In addition, the continuous number display unit 96 maintains a state in which the number of big hits (here, 3 times) up to that point is displayed until the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery ends and the second special game state ends. Then, the display ends with the end of the second special game state, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. , The display is maintained even in the second special game state based on the small hit derived in the special figure variation display game. Then, the display ends with the end of the second special gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fact that the fall lottery has been won first.

Further, in the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained even if the normal game state ST1 is entered. Therefore, in the special figure variation display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and the right-handed instruction notification is also maintained (t91 to t93). Further, even if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed. Further, even in the second special game state based on the small hit, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained (t93 to t94), and with the end of the second special game state (t94), the first game state display unit 56 is turned off according to the game state, and the right-handed instruction notification also ends.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fact that the fall lottery has been won by the display of the first game status display unit 56, the right-handed instruction notification, and the left-handed instruction notification at an early stage, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented. In addition, if the player returns to the left-handed hit, the start of the right-handed hit in the second special game state may be delayed and the start of winning the special variable winning device 38 may be delayed, but the game proceeds with the right-handed hit. By maintaining the state, it is possible to prevent the start of winning the special variable winning device 38 from being delayed. In particular, in the second special gaming state based on a small hit, since the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, it is possible to reliably win a prize by maintaining the state in which the game progresses by hitting right.

FIG. 89 (b) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit, and the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is started during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The case where it was done was shown. In this case as well, as in FIG. 88 (a), the fall lottery is won when the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t111), and the game state is normal. The game state is ST1. For the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, a fixed time (10000 ms here) is set as the fluctuation time (t111 to t113), and this special figure fluctuation display game is being executed (t111 to t114) and the second special. During the gaming state (t114 to t115), the first specific effect is performed. The content of this first specific effect is the same as that of the first specific effect shown in FIG. 89 (a).

In this example, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit during the execution of the first specific effect, has been started (t112). Along with this, a second specific effect for suggesting and notifying the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is added to the first specific effect and started (t112). The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t114), after which the second special game state is set.

The special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted due to the derivation of the small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (t113 to t115), and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the second special gaming state (t115). ). When the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is not executed, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the normal mode is produced when the second special game state ends, but here, the special figure that becomes a big hit The third specific effect is executed during the period during which the variable display game is being executed (t115-116). As a result, it is possible to suggest or notify the player that the game will be a big hit, and it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped by winning the fall lottery. After that, with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, the first special game state is set (t117).

Further, in the continuous number display unit 96, the number of big hits (here, 3 times) up to that point is displayed even in the second special game state after the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won, as in FIG. 89 (a). The state is maintained. After that, it is temporarily hidden, but it is restarted with the number of big hits updated by +1 with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game which is a big hit. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. To. Further, with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit started before the end of the special figure variation display game, the number of big hits before the transition to the normal game state ST1 is taken over and added. This jackpot variable display game is a jackpot variable display game that was started before the end of the special map variable display game that won the fall lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained even if the normal game state ST1 is entered. Therefore, in the special figure variation display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and the right-handed instruction notification is also maintained (t111 to t114). Further, even if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed. Further, even in the second special game state based on the small hit, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained (t114 to t115), and with the end of the second special game state (t115), the first game state display unit 56 is turned off according to the game state, and the right-handed instruction notification also ends. In addition, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97, a left-handed instruction notification is given.

In this example, a special result is obtained later, so that the game progresses by right-handed, and the game progresses to the first special game state. However, with the end of the second special game state, the effect state is the normal mode effect with the third specific effect added. Since it will be a production (t115-t116), it was found from the launch direction that the game will proceed with a left-handed strike corresponding to the normal game state, and a special result will be derived in the first special figure variation display game. It prevents it from being stolen.

As described above, by performing the first specific effect in the case of winning the fall lottery or in the case of a big hit, one of the events of greatly different value for the player, such as the transition to a low probability and the derivation of the big hit, will occur. It can be notified, giving the player a sense of anxiety and anticipation, and improving the interest of the game. In addition, if a special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit is started during the execution of the first specific effect, the fall lottery is won by the first specific effect by performing the second specific effect or the third specific effect. Even when the game is notified, the player can be notified of the possibility of a big hit, and it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped due to a fall.

In addition, if the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery becomes a big hit, or if the special figure fluctuation display game that wins the fall lottery starts before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, the result will be Even if the derivation time is the normal game state ST1, it is treated in the same way as the big hit derived in the specific game state, and the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is added by taking over the number of big hits before shifting to the normal game state ST1. I am doing it. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy with a player who is still recognized as being in a specific game state due to the execution of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect, and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. can do.

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, it was found early that the fall lottery was won by maintaining the state in which the game progresses by hitting right even if the game has shifted to the normal game state ST1. It can be prevented from being lost.

FIG. 90 shows an example of the display on the display device 41. 90 (a) to 90 (g) show an example of the first specific effect executed when the fall lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5 or when a big hit is obtained. As shown in FIG. 90A, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started, the variable display is started on the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b. , The first specific effect is started. In this first specific effect, the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight each other, and the result of the special figure variation display game and the presence / absence of a fall lottery are notified based on the result of the battle.

In addition, a right-handed instruction notification 99 for instructing right-handed is displayed in the lower left of the display area. The right-handed instruction notification 99 here has a different notification mode from the right-handed instruction notification 99 in the state where the first specific effect is not performed in the fourth specific game state ST5 as shown in FIG. 24 (b). ing. When the first specific effect is performed, it may have already fallen into the normal game state ST1. In the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the launch direction for advancing the game is maintained to be right-handed even in the normal game state ST1, but in the normal game state ST1, the game is originally advanced by left-handed. It is in a state of doing. In this way, when there is a possibility that the original firing direction corresponding to the game state and the designated firing direction do not match, the notification mode of the right-handed instruction notification 99 is made different.

As shown in FIG. 90B, the character fights, and when the fluctuation time ends, the result of the fight is shown. If the result is out of order in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 90 (c). In addition, the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b also display the result mode of the detachment.

In the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the state in which such a first specific effect is executed has already shifted to the normal game state ST1, but the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained. Even during the execution of the first specific effect, the right-handed instruction notification 99 for instructing the right-handed person is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the shutter display 93, which is a display imitating the shutter, is closed, and as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the shutter display 93 is completely closed to enter the fourth specific gaming state. The end of ST5, the notification of the number of prize balls acquired in the fourth specific game state ST5, and the notification of the number of big hits notified by the continuous number display unit 96 are performed. That is, the shutter display 93 forms an image notifying that the fall lottery has been won. Then, it shifts to the effect display of the normal game state ST1. In addition, the right-handed instruction notification 99 ends with the transition to the effect display of the normal game state ST1. If the result is incorrect, the right-handed instruction notification 99 may be terminated at the stage of FIG. 90 (c).

If the result is a small hit in the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the ally character 89a is defeated as shown in FIG. 90 (c), and the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the first 2 Decorative special figure 2 The result mode of the small hit is displayed on the game display unit 88b. After that, the second special gaming state is entered with the display of FIG. 90 (c), and the displays of FIGS. 90 (d) and (e) are performed at the end of the second special gaming state.

If the result is a big hit in the special figure variation display game regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won, the ally as shown in FIG. 90 (f) after the character fights as shown in FIG. 90 (b). The result is that the character 89a wins. In addition, the result mode of the big hit is displayed on the first decoration special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decoration special figure 2 game display unit 88b. And after this, the special game state is started.

In this way, when the result is a big hit, the number of big hits displayed on the continuous number display unit 96 is updated by +1 and is updated from 3 times shown in FIG. 90 (b) and the like to 4 times. If the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit does not win the fall lottery, it is a big hit in the 4th specific game state ST5, and it is a big hit that occurred during the specific period in which the game information is accumulated. The value of is updated by +1.

In addition, when the fall lottery is won in the special figure fluctuation display game that is a big hit, the game is temporarily shifted to the normal game state ST1, but as an exceptional specific case, even if the big hit is in the normal game state ST1, 1 The addition result up to that point is taken over and added instead of the second time. As mentioned above, during the execution of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the first specific effect that suggests or notifies that the fall lottery was won is performed, but in the case of a big hit, it is clear that the player has fallen. Since the player does not clearly know that he / she has won the fall lottery, the notification can be made without discomfort by taking over the addition result up to that point and adding the result. Further, since the right-handed instruction notification 99 is also continuously performed, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that he / she has fallen into the normal game state ST1.

In addition, when the result is missed or a small hit in the special figure variation display game without winning the fall lottery, the first specific effect may be performed as a so-called ghost effect. In this case, after the character fights as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the result of the draw is made as shown in FIG. 90 (g). In addition, the first decorative special figure 2 game display unit 85b and the second decorative special figure 2 game display unit 88b also display the result mode of the missed or small hit.

FIG. 91 shows an example of the second specific effect and the third specific effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), an example in which the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit is shown, but the same applies to the case where the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery is started, the first specific effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 91 (b), during the execution of the first specific effect. When the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is started, a band 94 displaying "Warning !!" is displayed as the second specific effect so as to overlap the front side of the first specific effect. This band 94 is also displayed when the result is shown in the first specific effect as shown in FIG. 91 (c), so as to suggest that there is a result different from the result shown by the first specific effect. ing.

As shown in FIG. 91 (d), the band 94 is not displayed during the execution of the second special gaming state. Then, when the second special game state ends and the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is restarted, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), as the third specific effect, "waiting for intense heat !!" Band 95 is displayed. At this point, the right-handed instruction notification 99 ends. After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the shutter display 93 is opened so that the normal mode effect can be seen, and as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the band 95 is also displayed when the variable display is performed in the normal mode effect. It keeps being displayed. Then, the result mode of the big hit is displayed as shown in FIG. 91 (h), and the first special gaming state is entered as shown in FIG. 91 (i). A right-handed instruction notification 99 is started with the start of the first special gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 91 (f), the display of the continuous number display unit 96 temporarily ends when it becomes the normal mode effect which is the effect of the normal game state ST1, but as shown in FIG. 91 (i), the first special The display is started when the game state is produced. Here, the special figure fluctuation display game that was started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is a big hit, and although it has once shifted to the normal game state ST1, the number of big hits before the fall It has been updated from 3 times before the fall to 4 times. Although the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is temporarily terminated when the normal mode production is performed, the display may be continuously displayed here as well. This can also suggest or notify that there is a possibility of a big hit.

Although the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed in a band shape, other display may be used. In addition, although the second specific effect and the third specific effect are displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first specific effect, the second specific effect and the third specific effect are performed instead of the first specific effect. Is also good. Further, only one of the second specific effect and the third specific effect may be performed.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game. Is provided as a control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for controlling the game in the game machine that generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained, and the control means is the first. When it is decided to change the gaming state with the fulfillment of one condition, the first specific effect for notifying the change in the gaming state can be executed, and the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the first specific effect. When it is decided to change the gaming state in accordance with the above, in addition to the first specific effect or in place of the first specific effect, a second notifying the change in the gaming state due to the establishment of the second condition. It means that a specific effect can be executed. Therefore, even if the second condition is satisfied after the start of the first specific effect, the change in the gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) forming a starting winning opening are provided, and the control means is the first starting. The first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth, the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting mouth, and the first variable is executed. The display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and when the first condition is satisfied and it is decided to change the game state with the execution of one of the variable display games, the change in the game state is notified. When it is possible to execute the first specific effect, and it is determined that the second condition is satisfied and the game state is changed along with the execution of the other variable display game during the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific effect is performed. In addition to or in place of the first specific effect, it is possible to execute a second specific effect that notifies a change in the gaming state due to the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, even if the second condition is satisfied after the start of the first specific effect, the change in the gaming state based on the establishment of the second condition can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even when two variable display games are changed at the same time, a change in the game state based on the execution of each variable display game can be notified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the control means executes a third specific effect for notifying the change in the game state due to the establishment of the second condition in the period from the end of the first specific effect to the change in the game state due to the establishment of the second condition. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to notify the change of the game state based on the establishment of the second condition, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In FIG. 92A, a special figure variation display game that is a big hit in a specific game state was started, but a special figure variation display game that won a fall lottery during execution of the special figure variation display game was started. As a result, an example is shown in which the game falls into the normal game state ST1 and the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery ends before the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit.

In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit in the fourth specific game state ST5, has been started (t121). Then, during the execution of this special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery has started (t122). With the start of this special figure 2 variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the game state becomes the normal game state ST1.

Since a fixed time (10000 ms in this case) is set as the fluctuation time for the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery, the special figure 2 variation display game that has won the fall lottery has started. Special Figure 1 It is possible to grasp which one ends first from the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game. Here, it is understood that the special figure 2 variable display game that wins the fall lottery ends with a deviation result before the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit.

After that, the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery ended with a deviation result earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game that became a big hit (t124), and a new special figure 2 variable display game was started. In the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained even if the game is shifted to the normal game state ST1, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lit state, and the right-handed instruction is given. Notification is also maintained (t122 to t124). Further, even if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97 during this period, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed. Then, by the end (t124) of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game is advanced by left-handed, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and the right-handed notification is completed. To do.

After that, as the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, ends, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result (t125). After that, when the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special gaming state is started (t126). With the start of the first special game state, the game is advanced by right-handed striking, the first game state display unit 56 is turned on, and the right-handed striking notification is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 92A, either the effect state 1 or the effect state 2 can be executed as the effect. The effect state 1 is an effect as shown in FIG. First, in the fourth specific game state ST5, since the game progresses with the special figure 2 variable display game as the main variation, there is no change in the production state at the time when the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is started (t121). The game progresses. Then, when the special figure 2 variable display game that has won the fall lottery is started (t122), the first specific effect is started. The content of this first specific effect is an effect in which the ally character 89a and the enemy character 89b fight as shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (e), and since the fall lottery has been won here, the final result. An effect is performed to the effect that the ally character 89a is defeated, the shutter display 93 is closed, and the fourth specific game state ST5 ends (t122 to t124).

When the predetermined timing during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery during the execution of the first specific effect (t123), the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit is suggested or notified. A second specific effect for this is added. The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game. The content of this second effect is an effect of displaying a band 94 displayed as "Warning !!" as shown in FIGS. 91 (b) and 91 (c).

After that, the third specific effect is started with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery (t124). As shown in FIGS. 91 (f) and 91 (g), the content of the third specific effect is an effect of displaying the band 95 displayed as "waiting for intense heat !!". By setting such an effect state 1, it is possible to suggest or notify the player that a big hit will occur, and it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped by winning the fall lottery.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit stops (t125), the decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a stops at the display corresponding to the result as shown in FIG. 91 (h) and the big hit. It is shown that it became. Further, at the stop display time (t125 to t126), the result mode is clearly displayed as shown in FIG. 91 (i).

The display of the continuous number display unit 96 becomes a normal mode effect, which is an effect of the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIG. 91 (f), due to the end (t124) of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery. However, the display is started when the first special game state is produced as shown in FIG. 91 (i). Here, the special figure fluctuation display game that was started before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is a big hit, and although it has once shifted to the normal game state ST1, the number of big hits before the fall Will continue to be added, and will be updated from 3 times before the fall to 4 times.

The effect state 2 is an effect that does not perform the first specific effect that suggests or notifies that the fall lottery has been won for the effect state 1. FIG. 93 shows an example of this effect state 2. In the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses with the special figure 2 variable display game as the main variable. Therefore, at the time when the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, is started (t121 in FIG. 92 (a)), FIG. As shown in 93 (a), there is no change in the production state and the game progresses.

After that, when the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery was started (t122 in FIG. 92 (a)), as shown in FIG. 93 (b), there was no change in the production state and the game proceeded. When the predetermined timing of the special figure 2 variable display game is reached (t123 in FIG. 92 (a)), as shown in FIG. 93 (c), a first for suggesting or notifying the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit. 2 The specific effect is added to the first specific effect and started. The second specific effect is continued until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game (t124 in FIG. 92 (a)). The content of this second effect is an effect of displaying a band 94 displayed as "Warning !!" as shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 93 (d).

After that, the third specific effect is started with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery (t124 in FIG. 92 (a)). As shown in FIG. 93 (e), the content of the third specific effect is an effect of displaying the band 95 displayed as "waiting for intense heat !!". In addition, the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit depending on the content of the dialogue of the character 89a, is suggested or notified. By setting the effect state 2 as such, it is possible to suggest or notify that the player will be a big hit without being aware that he / she has won the fall lottery.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game that becomes a big hit is stopped (t125 in FIG. 92 (a)), as shown in FIG. 93 (f), the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a, the second decoration Special Figure 1 It is shown that the game display unit 88a stops at the display corresponding to the result, and the character 89a makes a big hit. Further, at the stop display time (t125 to t126 in FIG. 92 (a)), the result mode is clearly displayed as shown in FIG. 93 (g), and the effect of the first special gaming state is shown as shown in FIG. 93 (h). Is started.

The right-handed notification ends with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery as shown in FIG. 93 (e), and the start of the first special gaming state as shown in FIG. 93 (h). It will be started with. In this effect state 2, even if the player wins the fall lottery and shifts to the normal game state ST1, the small hit RUSH effect is continued, so the right-handed notification is not terminated and is continuously performed. Even if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97, the left-handed instruction notification may not be performed.

The display of the continuous number display unit 96 is maintained even after the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery ends, and the display is started to be updated by +1 when the first special game state is produced. In this case as well, although the game has once shifted to the normal game state ST1, the number of big hits before the fall is continuously added, and the number is updated from 3 times before the fall to 4 times.

That is, when the end condition is satisfied (winning the fall lottery) during the execution of one of the special figure variation display games that is started during the specific period, the other that is started before the start of the one variation display game. When the start condition of a new specific period is satisfied (the jackpot is derived) after the end condition is satisfied by the variable display game of, it is possible not to execute the end effect (first specific effect). Further, it is possible to execute a specific effect (second specific effect, third specific effect) in addition to or instead of the end effect.

It should be noted that the execution mode of the effect is not limited to the above, and for example, since it is known that a big hit will occur later at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, FIG. 90 as the first specific effect. The effect of showing a big hit as shown in (f) may be performed from the start of the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won.

In FIG. 92 (b), a special figure variation display game that is a big hit in a specific game state was started, but a special figure variation display game that won a fall lottery was started during the execution of the special figure variation display game. As a result, an example is shown in which the player falls into the normal game state ST1 and the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, ends first.

In the example shown in FIG. 92 (b), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit in the fourth specific game state ST5, has been started (t131). Then, during the execution of this special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery has started (t132). With the start of this special figure 2 variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. At this point, it is known that the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit in the game machine, ends the variable time before the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery.

After that, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit, ends before the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery, and the special figure 2 variable display game is compulsory accordingly. It is stopped as a result of losing (t133). After that, when the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the first special game state is started (t134).

In such a case, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the fall lottery was won, it was selected not to perform the first specific effect suggesting or notifying that the fall lottery was won, and FIG. 93 (c). A second specific effect is performed to suggest or notify the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit as shown in. By setting such an effect state, it is possible to suggest or notify that the player will be a big hit without being aware that he / she has won the fall lottery.

Further, in this example as well, the special figure variation display game that is a big hit other than the normal game state ST1 is started, but the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery is started during the execution of the special figure variation display game. In the case of falling to the normal game state ST1, the game has temporarily shifted to the normal game state ST1 due to the winning of the fall lottery, but the value of the continuous number display unit 96 should be continuously added to the number of big hits before the fall. It has become.

Further, in the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained even if the game shifts to the normal game state ST1, and the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lit state and is on the right. The striking instruction notification is also maintained (t132 to t134). In addition, even if the second start winning opening 97 is won, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed. Therefore, in this example, the state in which the game progresses by hitting right is maintained.

As described above, during the specific game state or the special game state which is the specific period, the game progresses by right-handed, and in the normal game state ST1 which is not the specific period, the game progresses by the left-handed, so the right-handed instruction notification is sent to the game state. If it corresponds to, the player can grasp whether or not it is a specific period. Therefore, when the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is continuously added to the number of big hits before the fall, the current launch direction of the game ball is not clearly indicated, or it is specified even during the period when the normal game state ST1 is once entered. By showing the firing direction as it is in the game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the fall.

Further, in the above description, the inheritance of the display of the continuous number display unit 96 at the end of the specific period due to the end of the fourth specific game state ST5 has been described, but the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 and Similarly, at the end of the specific period due to the end of the third specific game state ST4, if the start condition of the specific period is immediately satisfied, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 may be inherited and added. good.

In addition, although it was decided to maintain the state in which the game progresses by right-handed until the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed until the middle of the special figure fluctuation display game is maintained. You can do it. For example, even if the state in which the game progresses by hitting right is maintained from the start of the special figure variation display game to a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time is reached, it becomes clear that the player has fallen in the first specific effect. good. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fact that the fall lottery has been won at an early stage, and it is possible to change the launch direction according to the game state as soon as possible.

In addition, the game control device 100 maintains a state in which the game progresses by right-handed until the end of the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery, and the first game state display unit 56 lights up until the end of the special figure variation display game. Although the state is maintained, the effect control device 300 may end the right-handed instruction notification 99 without interlocking with the display of the first game state display unit 56. For example, it may end when it becomes clear that the fall has occurred in the first specific effect.

Further, when the special figure 1 variable display game is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery as in the example shown in FIG. 89 (b), the right-handed instruction notification is given. You may end 99, or you may shift to a state where the game progresses by hitting left. That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game that can be started by the original launch direction corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started, the player starts left-handed in anticipation of the normal game state ST1. The right-handed instruction notification 99 may be terminated and / or left-handed to shift to a state in which the game proceeds.

Under such conditions, by making it possible to end the right-handed instruction notification 99 or shift to a state in which the game progresses by left-handed, the player falls by temporarily left-handed during the execution of the first specific effect. It is also possible to give a new playability that it is possible to know whether or not it is done. Further, if the probability is high even though the first specific effect is executed, that is, if a special result is obtained, the right-handed instruction notification 99 even if the special figure 1 variable display game is started by left-handed. The state in which the game progresses by hitting right is maintained without ending. As a result, it is possible to have a new playability that it is possible to know whether or not a special result is obtained by temporarily hitting the left side during the execution of the first specific effect.

In addition, if the fall lottery is won in the special figure 1 variable display game that has irregular fluctuations in the fourth specific game state ST5, the game progresses by left-handed with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. The right-handed instruction notification 99 may be terminated at the same time as the transition to, or the game is progressed by right-handed until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game that won the fall lottery as in the special figure 2 variable display game. May be maintained and the right-handed instruction notification 99 may be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the irregular fluctuation occurs in the fourth specific game state ST5, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the main fluctuation is performed is entered into a fall lottery. If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit when winning, the special figure 2 variable display game won in the fall lottery will maintain the state of progressing the game by right-handed even after the end, and right-handed instruction notification. You may try to keep 99. That is, during the period from t124 to t126 in FIG. 92 (a), the state in which the game progresses by hitting right may be maintained and the right-handed instruction notification 99 may be maintained.

Further, in the above example, the case where the fall lottery is won has been described, but as shown in FIG. 22 (a), 100 times from the end of the first special game state in the state of the second specific game state ST3. Similarly, when the special figure variation display game is executed, in the special figure variation display game (101st special figure variation display game) that has shifted to the normal game state ST1, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained. You may. In addition, although it does not exist in the above-mentioned transition of the gaming state, when the state in which the game is advanced by left-handed is changed to the state in which the game is advanced by right-handed without going through the special gaming state, there is a case where the transition is made. In the transitioned special figure variation display game, the state in which the game progresses by left-handed may be maintained.

Further, although only the right-handed instruction notification 99 is given as the instruction of the firing direction to be continuously displayed, only the left-handed instruction notification may be given, or the right-handed instruction notification 99 and the left-handed instruction notification 99 may be given. May be displayed according to the game state.

Further, the configuration of the second modification may be applied to the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above. For example, the above-mentioned first specific effect may be performed when the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit in the third specific game state ST4, is started, and the transition to the fourth specific game state ST5 may be produced. good. Further, when the special figure variation display game that does not become a big hit is started in the third specific game state ST4, the first specific effect may be performed as a ghost effect. In addition, when the fall lottery is won in the 4th specific game state ST5 and the transition to the 5th specific game state ST6 is performed, it is suggested or notified that a big hit will be obtained by performing the 2nd specific effect or the 3rd specific effect. You may do so. Further, in the case of shifting to the fifth specific game state ST6, the effect mode as shown in FIG. 93 may be used. Further, when the fifth specific game state ST6 is entered, the values of the continuous number display unit 96 and the cumulative prize ball number display unit 92 may be inherited from the values before the transition to the fifth specific game state ST6. You may try to clear 0.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game. Is a game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game and a production control means (game control device 100) that controls the production of the game in the game machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained. The game control is provided with an effect control device 300), a first start opening (first start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) forming a starting winning opening. As a means, the first variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the second variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. The first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and the effect control means is started when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. The period can be set, the game information from the start to the end of the specific period can be accumulated and notified, and the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period. If the start condition for a new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the end of the one variable display game, the start condition is satisfied. In the specific period newly started based on, it is possible to accumulate the game information following the game information accumulated in the specific period set at the start of the one of the variable display games. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, the game control means can execute an end effect (first specific effect) for notifying that the end condition has been satisfied, and the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period. In this case, if the start condition for a new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the start of the one variable display game, the end effect is not executed. Will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, the game control means can execute an end effect for notifying that the end condition is satisfied, and the end condition is satisfied during the execution of one of the variable display games started during the specific period. If the start condition for a new specific period is satisfied after the end condition is satisfied by the other variable display game started before the start of the one variable display game, in addition to the end effect or in place of the end effect. It means that a specific effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, when the end condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display game started during the specific period, and the new start condition for the specific period is satisfied with the end of the variable display game being executed. , In the specific period newly started with the end of the variable display game, the game information may be accumulated following the game information accumulated in the specific period set at the start of the variable display game. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the accumulated game information and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, a game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the game ball to the start winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97) provided in the game area 32. A game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls a game in a game machine that executes a game based on a prize and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. The game area includes a game area on one side and a game area on the other side, and the player controls the firing force of the game ball. By adjusting, it is possible to select whether to let the game ball flow down to the game area on one side or the game area on the other side, and the game control means can set one game state from a plurality of game states. It is configured to shift the game state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined transition condition, and for each game state, by firing the game ball to either the game area on one side or the game area on the other side. Whether to proceed with the game is predetermined, and the effect control means can execute the launch direction instruction notification instructing the game area in which the game ball should be launched in response to the set game state, and a predetermined transition. In the game in which the conditions are satisfied, it is possible to execute the launch direction instruction notification corresponding to the game state before the transition even if the game state is shifted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being found to have changed at an early stage and the interest in the game from being lowered.

In addition, the game control means sets the game area in which the game ball to be launched in the game in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied to be the game area corresponding to the game state before the transition even if the transition of the gaming state is performed. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being found to have changed at an early stage and the interest in the game from being lowered. In addition, it is possible to prevent a contradiction between the launch direction defined by the game control device 100 and the notification of the launch direction by the effect control device 300.

Further, the predetermined transition condition is to shift the game state accompanied by the change of the game area in which the game ball should be launched, and the effect control means is a game in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied and the result is a special result. It is possible to execute a common specific effect with the game. Therefore, by executing the common specific effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by suggesting that the transition condition is satisfied or the special result is derived, and the transition condition can be enhanced during the execution of the common specific effect. It is possible to prevent it from being known whether the establishment of the above or the derivation of the special result.

Further, the effect control means can have different notification modes depending on whether the launch direction instruction notification corresponding to the current game state is performed or the launch direction instruction notification not corresponding to the current game state is performed. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the launch direction instruction notification does not correspond to the current gaming state.

Further, the effect control means is a game after the transition in a state in which the transition of the game state is performed in the game in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied and the launch direction instruction notification corresponding to the game state before the transition is executed. When the launch of the game ball corresponding to the state is detected, the launch direction instruction notification is changed to correspond to the game state after the transition. Therefore, when the player knows the actual launch direction, it is possible to prevent the launch direction instruction notification.

Further, a first starting port (first starting winning opening 36) forming a starting winning opening is provided in the game area on one side, and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) forming a starting winning opening is provided in the game area on the other side. ) Is provided, and the game control means executes the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. The second game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed as a game, the first game and the second game can be executed at the same time, and the special results include the first special result (big hit) and the second special result (small hit). ) Is included, and the probability that the result of the game becomes the first special result is the same probability in the first game and the second game, and the low probability state and the high probability state higher than the low probability state If it is set to either of them and it is in a high probability state, it is configured to perform a fall lottery to shift to the low probability state every time the game is executed, and the probability that the result of the game will be the second special result is low. The probability is the same in both the probabilistic state and the high-probability state, and in the game state in which the game ball is fired to the game area on the other side to proceed with the game, the game ball is fired to the game area on one side. This means that the fluctuation time of the second game is shorter than the game state in which the game progresses. Therefore, the game playability can be changed depending on the launch direction, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the above-described embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37 forming the first starting port is also provided in the game area on the right side, but the first starting port may not be provided in the game area on the right side.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machines of this modified example differ in the transition of the gaming state and the execution mode of the effect. Further, depending on this, the case where the value before the fall is inherited for the display on the continuous number display unit 96 is different.

FIG. 94 shows the transition of the gaming state in this modified example. In this modified example, as in the second modified example, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, the fall lottery is not won in the first specific game state ST2, and no special result is derived, and 100 special figures are drawn. When the variable display game is executed, the process shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5. The probability state and the like in each game state are the same as in the case of the second modification. Then, when the fall lottery is won in the fourth specific game state ST5, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In addition, the transition destination when the probability variation jackpot is derived in the first specific gaming state ST2, the second specific gaming state ST3, and the fourth specific gaming state ST5 is different from the second modification, and in this modification, the special gaming state After that, the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5, and when a normal jackpot is derived, the game shifts to the second specific game state ST3 after the special game state. That is, even if the probability variation jackpot is the same, the game state that shifts between the case where it is derived in the normal game state ST1 and the case where it is derived in the specific game state is different, and the value obtained for the player is different.

The variation pattern selected in each gaming state in this modification is basically the same as in the case of the second modification, but the variation pattern selected in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 is partially different. In addition, the execution mode of the effect in this modified example is basically the same as that in the second modified example, but some of them are different. In this modified example, since the transition destination of the subsequent gaming state differs depending on the gaming state when the jackpot is derived, the player is made to clearly grasp the gaming state when the jackpot is derived, giving a sense of discomfort and distrust. You need to avoid it. For this reason, the execution mode of the effect is partially different from that of the second modification. A case different from the second modification will be described below.

FIG. 95 shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the fourth specific gaming state ST5 of this modified example. FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (c) are the same as in the case of the second modification. As shown in FIG. 95 (d), 20000 ms is set for the special figure variable display game in which the result is a big hit, and for the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is irregular, if the fall lottery is not won. If the fall lottery is won, 10000 ms is set. In these cases, the specific effect that is set when the fall lottery is won when the result is off or a small hit is not set.

In addition, 10000 ms is set for the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable, regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won. Of these, if the fall lottery is not won, a specific effect is set, and if the fall lottery is won, the specific effect is not set. The reason why a specific effect is not set for the special figure variation display game that is a big hit that wins the fall lottery is to perform a normal mode effect in order to let the player know that the fall lottery has been won from an early stage.

FIG. 96A shows a case where a fall lottery is won in a special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit. It is basically the same as the case of the second modified example shown in FIG. 88 (b), but the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 are the case of the second modified example shown in FIG. 88 (b). Different from.

When the new special figure 2 variable display game is started, the fall lottery is won, the probability state is set to the low probability state (t81), and the game state is the normal game state ST1. In addition, with the start of the special figure variation display game that is a big hit that won the fall lottery, the small hit RUSH effect ends and becomes the normal mode effect, and the big hit effect in the normal mode effect is executed (t81- t82).

Further, as a result of winning the fall lottery and shifting to the normal game state ST1 (t81), the state in which the game progresses by right-handed ends, the first game state display unit 56 turns off, and the right-handed instruction is given. The notification ends. In addition, if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97, the state of giving a left-handed instruction notification is started. That is, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the fall lottery is won and the special figure variation display game which is a big hit is started, the special figure variation display game won by the fall lottery is started, and the right The state in which the game progresses by hitting is terminated, and the right-handed instruction notification is terminated.

In this way, by setting the normal mode effect and setting the first game state display unit 56, the right-handed instruction notification, and the left-handed instruction notification to be in a state corresponding to the normal game state ST1, the derivation of the jackpot is the normal game state ST1. It is possible to clearly show what was done in the above, and it is possible to prevent the player from questioning the transition destination of the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Further, by shifting to the normal mode effect without executing the first specific effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal state, and it is possible to raise the expectation. Then, after the end of this special figure variation display game, the first special game state is set and the first special game production is performed (t83).

In the continuous number display unit 96, since the end condition of the specific period is satisfied with the transition to the normal game state ST1, the display is ended and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t81). After that, with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, a new start condition for a specific period is satisfied, so that the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the player can grasp that it is the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the transition to the fourth specific gaming state ST5 does not occur immediately after the end of the first special gaming state.

When the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, the result display at the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 91 (d) may be displayed. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (e) to 91 (h) may be performed.

FIG. 96 (b) shows a case where the fall lottery is won in the special figure variation display game in which the result is a small hit, and the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is started during the execution of the special figure variation display game. The case where it was done was shown. It is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 89 (b), but the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 is different from the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 89 (b).

In the continuous number display unit 96, the state of displaying the number of big hits (here, 3 times) up to that point is maintained even in the second special game state after the special figure variation display game in which the fall lottery is won. That is, at the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, the game transitions to the normal game state ST1, and the end condition of the specific period for accumulating the game information is satisfied, but the display is maintained at this point. To. Then, with the end of the second special gaming state, the display is terminated and the number of jackpots is cleared to 0 (t115).

In addition, in the special figure variation display game that has won the fall lottery for performing a specific effect, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained even if the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Therefore, in the special figure variation display game, the first game state display unit 56 maintains the lighting state, and the right-handed instruction notification is also maintained (t111 to t114). In addition, even if there is a prize in the second start winning opening 97, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed. Further, even in the second special game state based on the small hit, the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is maintained (t114 to t115), and with the end of the second special game state (t115), the first game state display unit 56 is turned off according to the game state, and the right-handed instruction notification also ends.

After that, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, and a new specific period is started. Therefore, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1 is used. It makes it possible for the player to grasp something. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the transition to the fourth specific gaming state ST5 does not occur immediately after the end of the first special gaming state.

In addition, the display device 41 is designed to perform the effect shown in FIG. 91, and the normal mode is produced when the second special game state ends, and the first game state display unit 56 and the right-handed instruction are given. By setting the notification and the left-handed instruction notification to be in a state corresponding to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to grasp that the state has shifted to the normal game state ST1. In this example, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 in FIG. 91 (i) is 1.

Further, the execution time (t111 to t113) of the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery is the variation time (t112 to t113 and t115 to t116) of the special figure variation display game which is a big hit started in the normal game state ST1. It is shorter than the total time). Therefore, when the special figure change display game won in the fall lottery is started first or at the same time, the special figure change display game won in the fall lottery always ends first. Therefore, it is possible to secure a time for notifying the player that the game is in the normal game state ST1 before the jackpot result is derived, and the player is surely aware that the jackpot is derived in the normal game state ST1. It is possible. In addition, at least when the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is started first or at the same time, the production content can be determined without referring to the fluctuation time of both special figure fluctuation display games, and the processing is easy. can do.

In addition, as a result of winning the fall lottery and shifting to the normal game state ST1 (t111), the state in which the game proceeds by right-handed may be maintained and the right-handed instruction notification may be terminated. Further, as a result of winning the fall lottery and shifting to the normal game state ST1, (t111) the display of the continuous number display unit may be hidden and the number of big hits may be cleared to 0.

Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting winning opening 97), and the result of the variable display game. Is a game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game and a first start port (the first start port) that forms a start winning opening in the game machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained. A first starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37) and a second starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) are provided, and the game control means varies based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening. The first variable display game is executed as a game, the second variable display game is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, and the first variable display game and the second variable display game are executed at the same time. It is possible, and it is possible to set a specific period that starts when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and ends when a predetermined end condition that can be satisfied at the start of the variable display game is satisfied, and derives a special result. The game value given to the player differs depending on whether or not is in a specific period, and the execution time of the variable display game in which the end condition of the specific period is satisfied is a variation that is a special result that is started when the specific period is not specified. It will be shorter than the execution time of the display game. Therefore, when the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied is started after the variable display game in which the end condition is satisfied is started, the special result is derived with the specific period ending, so that the game value obtained is the game. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy with the recognition of the person and prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, the game control means can execute the end effect (first specific effect) for notifying that the end condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display game in which the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the obtained game value and the player's recognition, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, the start condition of the specific period can be satisfied with the derivation of the special result, but the time when the start condition is satisfied differs depending on which period the specific period is set. That is, when the special gaming state is included in addition to the specific gaming state as the specific period, the start condition is satisfied when the special gaming state accompanying the derivation of the special result in the non-specific gaming state is started. .. In addition, when the specific period is limited to the specific gaming state and does not include the special gaming state, the special gaming state associated with the derivation of the special result in the non-specific gaming state is terminated and the specific gaming state is started. The condition will be met.

In FIG. 97 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit is started before the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery, and the special figure 2 variable display game that won the fall lottery A special figure 1 in which the fluctuation time becomes a big hit An example of the effect state when the game ends before the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is shown. It is basically the same as the case of the second modified example shown in FIG. 92 (a), but the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 are the case of the second modified example shown in FIG. 92 (a). Different from. The effect states 1 and 2 correspond to the effect shown in FIG. 92 (a), and the different parts will be mainly described below.

In the effect state 1, the display of the continuous number display unit 96 ends with the end of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery, and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 (t124). After that, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the player can grasp that it is the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And.

In addition, the display device 41 is designed to perform the effect shown in FIG. 91, and the normal mode is produced when the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery ends, so that the normal game state ST1 is entered. It becomes possible to grasp what is happening. In this example, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 in FIG. 91 (i) is 1.

In the effect state 2, with the start of the special figure variation display game that won the fall lottery (t122), the small hit RUSH effect ends and the normal mode effect is performed, and the second specific effect is executed. After the end of the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery (t124), the third specific effect is performed until the end of the special figure variation display game (t126), which is a big hit, and then the first special game state is set. By setting the normal mode effect in this way, it is possible to clearly show that the jackpot was derived in the normal game state ST1, and the player has doubts about the transition destination of the game state after the end of the special game state. It can be prevented from holding. Further, by shifting to the normal mode effect without executing the first specific effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the situation is different from the normal state, and it is possible to raise the expectation.

In the continuous number display unit 96, the display is terminated and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 with the transition to the normal game state ST1 (t122). After that, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the player can grasp that it is the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And. When the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, the result display at the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 91 (d) may be displayed. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (e) to 91 (h) may be performed.

In addition, regarding the state in which the game is progressing, the display of the first game state display unit 56, and the right-handed instruction notification, both of the effect states 1 and 2 are won in the fall lottery and the normal game state ST1 is entered ( t121), the state in which the game progresses by right-handed is ended, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and the right-handed instruction notification is finished. That is, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the fall lottery is won and the special figure variation display game which is a big hit is executed, the special figure variation display game won by the fall lottery is started. The state in which the game progresses by right-handed is ended and the right-handed instruction notification is ended.

In addition, it is possible to maintain the state in which the game progresses by right-handed until the end (t124) of the special figure variation display game won in the fall lottery, and the right-handed instruction notification may be maintained, or the special figure 1 which becomes a big hit. From the execution of the variable display game to the derivation of the special result (t126), the state in which the game progresses by right-handed may be maintained and the right-handed instruction notification may be maintained.

FIG. 97 (b) shows an example of the effect state when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit than the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game won in the fall lottery, ends earlier. .. It is basically the same as the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 92 (b), but the effect state and the display content of the continuous number display unit 96 are the case of the second modification shown in FIG. 92 (b). Different from.

Special Figure 2 With the start of the variable display game, the probability state shifts to the low probability state, and the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. At this point, it is known that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit in the game machine, ends before the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game won in the fall lottery. In this case, it is selected that the normal mode effect is set at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the fall lottery is won, and that the first specific effect suggesting or notifying that the fall lottery is won is not performed. A specific production is performed.

Further, in the continuous number display unit 96, the display is terminated and the number of big hits is cleared to 0 with the transition to the normal game state ST1 (t132). After that, the first special game state is started with the end of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, and the display of the continuous number display unit 96 is started. In this case, since the gaming state when the jackpot is derived is the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the continuous number display unit 96 is set to 1, and the player can grasp that it is the jackpot derived in the normal gaming state ST1. And. When the small hit RUSH effect is ended and the normal mode effect is set, the result display at the end of the small hit RUSH effect as shown in FIG. 91 (d) may be displayed. Further, the effects shown in FIGS. 91 (e) to 91 (h) may be performed.

In addition, regarding the state in which the game is progressing, the display of the first game state display unit 56, and the right-handed instruction notification, the game is played by right-handed as the player wins the fall lottery and shifts to the normal game state ST1 (t132). The progressing state ends, the first game state display unit 56 turns off, and the right-handed instruction notification ends. That is, in the fourth specific game state ST5, when the fall lottery is won and the special figure variation display game which is a big hit is executed, the special figure variation display game won by the fall lottery is started. The state in which the game progresses by right-handed is ended and the right-handed instruction notification is ended.

In addition, if the special figure fluctuation display game that won the fall lottery is started within a predetermined period before the end of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal mode effect cannot be displayed for a sufficient time, the special figure variation display game will be a big hit. Figure It is also possible to notify that the fall lottery has been won at the stop time of the variable display game.

In addition, in order to show that the big hit after winning the fall lottery is the big hit in the normal game state ST1, the normal mode production is used, but the player can grasp that it is the big hit in the normal game state ST1. It is not limited to the normal mode production. For example, it may be shown that the normal game state ST1 is performed only by performing an additional effect such as the second specific effect or the third specific effect instead of the normal mode effect, or the normal game state ST1 may be indicated by voice. It may be shown that. In addition, the position where the movable character stays is different depending on whether the character is in the specific game state or the normal game state ST1, and the character is returned to the position of the normal game state ST1 in the normal game state ST1. It may be shown that there is.

In addition, during the specific game state or special game state, which is a specific period, the game progresses by right-handed, and in the normal game state ST1, which is not a specific period, the game progresses by left-handed, so that the instruction display of the launch direction of the game ball is used. It is also possible to indicate that the player has returned to the normal game state ST1. In particular, in the cases shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the player can be made to recognize more strongly by displaying the instruction display instructing the left-handed strike when returning to the normal game state ST1.

Further, although the inheritance of the display of the continuous number display unit 96 at the end of the specific period due to the end of the fourth specific game state ST5 has been described, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state have been described. Similarly, at the end of the specific period due to the end of ST4, it may be clearly shown that the normal gaming state ST1 has been entered. Further, the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game at which the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST3, and the third specific game state ST4 are terminated is a big hit started in the normal game state ST1. It may be made shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and each modification, it is determined whether or not to set the high probability state based on the symbol of the special result, but it depends on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area in the special game state. It may be decided whether or not to make a high probability state.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modified example can suggest the result of the special figure variation display game depending on the execution mode of the effect.

FIG. 98 shows an execution mode and a selection ratio for SP1 reach A among SP1 reach. The SP1 reach includes SP1 reach A and SP1 reach B, and is selected in a predetermined ratio. Further, as shown in FIG. 98, the SP1 reach A includes an out-of-order normal effect, a big hit normal effect, a discomfort effect A, a discomfort effect B, a discomfort effect C, and a discomfort effect D, which are selected at a predetermined ratio. ing. As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the result is out of order, only the out-of-order normal effect is selected. Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), when the result is a big hit, it is selected from the effects other than the normal effect.

SP1 reach A and SP1 reach B have very different production contents, for example, the production story is different. Further, the out-of-order normal effect, the jackpot normal effect, the discomfort effect A, the discomfort effect B, the discomfort effect C, and the discomfort effect D included in SP1 reach A have similar effect switching timings and effect contents, for example. The timing of switching the production is the same, or the production of the same story is performed, but the timing of change, the execution period, the characters that appear, etc. are slightly different.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a), the off-normal effect is an N reach effect that performs the first predetermined effect when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the special figure variation display game, and a second predetermined effect when a predetermined time elapses. It develops into SP reach A production that makes a specific production). After that, the fluctuation display stops due to the disconnection result. On the other hand, the big hit normal effect is designed to derive the result of the big hit after executing the same effect content as the off-normal effect, and the effect of deriving the result of the big hit is lost. It takes longer to stop fluctuating than the normal production.

These out-of-order normal effects and jackpot normal effects are selected with the highest probability when SP reach A is selected. Therefore, most of the cases of SP reach A end in the first execution period, which is the period in which the jackpot normal effect is executed. That is, the out-of-order normal effect and the jackpot normal effect are the first effect that ends in the first execution period. A routine that strongly impresses the player that the production content commonly executed in the out-of-order normal effect and the jackpot normal effect is the SP reach A effect by repeatedly executing these out-of-order normal effects and the jackpot normal effects. A state can be formed. In particular, the transition timing from the N reach effect that performs the first predetermined effect to the SP reach A effect that performs the second predetermined effect (specific effect) is the same timing for the off-normal effect and the jackpot normal effect. Can strongly impress the player and form a routine state.

Further, in the discomfort effects A to D, the execution time of the jackpot normal effect is longer by the amount of the second execution period, while the execution time is the first execution period. That is, the discomfort effects A to D form a second effect that is executed over the first execution period and the second execution period. The timing from the start of fluctuation to the N reach effect in the discomfort effects A to D is the same as that of the jackpot normal effect, but there are differences in other parts. That is, there is a part that makes me feel uncomfortable with the production of SP Reach A that impressed the player.

The discomfort effect A has the same development timing as the jackpot normal effect, which is the second predetermined effect, but the period from the development to the SP reach A effect to the suspension of fluctuation is only for the second execution period. It has become a long one. The production content of this discomfort effect A is to execute the common production content in the off-normal effect and the big hit normal effect, and in the case of the off-normal effect and the big hit normal effect, the variable display continues beyond the stop timing. It is designed to give the player a sense of discomfort. That is, the discomfort effect A is different from the normal effect and the jackpot normal effect because the timing of shifting to the stop display is off.

In the discomfort effect B, the development timing to the SP reach A effect, which is the second predetermined effect, is earlier than the jackpot normal effect. In this discomfort effect B, the period of the N reach state is short, which gives the player a discomfort. In addition, after the development to the SP reach A production, the common production contents are executed in the out-of-order normal production and the big hit normal production, but the difference in the rapid development to the SP reach A production is common to the out-of-order normal production and the big hit normal production. The variable display continues even after the production content is performed, which also gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In the discomfort effect C, the development timing to the SP reach A effect, which is the second predetermined effect, is later than the jackpot normal effect. In this discomfort effect C, the player is given a discomfort due to the long period of the N reach state. In addition, after the development to the SP reach A production, the common production contents are executed in the out-of-order normal production and the big hit normal, but the execution period of the SP reach A production is longer than the out-of-normal normal production and the big hit normal, and the out-of-normal normal production. In addition, the variable display continues even after the common production content is performed in the jackpot normal production, which also gives the player a sense of discomfort. If the period from the development to the SP reach A production to the stop of fluctuation is the same as the jackpot normal production, it will be the same as the jackpot normal production except that the period of the N reach state is long, and it is clear while giving the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to prevent the user from detecting that it is a big hit.

The discomfort effect D does not develop into the SP reach A effect that forms the second predetermined effect, and the N reach state continues for a long time to give a discomfort. It can be said that the discomfort effect D is a discomfort effect for N reach because there is no development into the SP reach A effect. Here, since the fluctuation time is the same as the discomfort effects A to C, it is included as the discomfort effect of SP reach A, but it may not be included as the discomfort effect of SP reach A.

When SP reach A is selected in the case where the result is out of order as shown in FIG. 98 (b), only the out-of-order normal effect is selected and the result is a big hit as shown in FIG. 98 (c). When SP reach A is selected in, most of them are big hit normal effects, and discomfort effects A to D are selected in a small proportion. As described above, the discomfort effects A to D are selected with a lower probability than the normal effect and the jackpot normal effect when the SP reach A is selected. Therefore, even if it becomes SP reach A, it hardly appears.

By making it possible to execute such discomfort effects A to D with a small probability in the case of a big hit, the routine state that impressed the player by executing the off-normal normal effect and the big hit normal effect frequently. It is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the above, and this discomfort state can imply a big hit.

Further, since the out-of-order normal effect and the jackpot normal effect have the same effect contents except that the timing of the change stop is different, the player cannot know the result until just before the timing of the change stop. On the other hand, in the discomfort effects B to D, the time at which the difference from the normal effect can be felt earlier than the jackpot normal effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to infer that the player feels uncomfortable at an early stage and becomes a big hit.

In addition, since the discomfort effects A to C execute the same production contents as the off-normal effect and the big hit normal, it is difficult for the player to be sure that the discomfort effect is a discomfort effect, and the player may be a big hit. Since you will be interested in the production and pay attention to the production, you can improve the interest of the game.

99 and 100 show an example of the display on the display device 41 in each pattern of SP reach A. As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when a new first start memory is generated in a state where the first special figure variation display game, which is the main variation in the normal game state ST1, is not executed, as shown in FIG. 99 (b). The special figure 1 variable display game is started, and the variable display is started on the first decorative special figure 1 game display unit 85a. When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area as shown in FIG. 99 (c). It will be an N reach production that produces a predetermined production.

In this N reach effect, the state of high-speed variable display in the direction in which the value of the identification information increases in the medium fluctuation display area is continued for a predetermined time, and then the speed of the variable display decreases, as shown in FIG. 99 (d). In addition, the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area is displayed in a variable manner at a low speed in a clearly visible state. There are at least two states (“2” in this case) that are the same as the identification information stopped in the left and right variable display areas, in which the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area is clearly visible and the variable display is performed at low speed. It is performed from the front identification information (here, "0"). In FIG. 99 (d), the same identification information as the identification information stopped in the left and right variable display areas has already passed, and the next identification information (here, “3”) has passed.

In the case of the out-of-order normal effect, the jackpot normal effect, and the discomfort effect A, as shown in FIG. 99 (d), when the next identification information of the identification information stopped in the left and right variable display areas is passed, As shown in FIG. 99 (e), it develops into the SP reach A production that performs the second predetermined production. In the case of the discomfort effect B, the same identification information as the identification information stopped in the left and right variable display areas as shown in FIG. 100 (a), which is the state before the state shown in FIG. 99 (d), passes through. When it becomes a state of being, it develops into SP reach A production.

Further, in the case of the discomfort effect C, the identification of the identification information stopped in the left and right variable display areas as shown in FIG. 100 (e), which is a state after the state shown in FIG. 99 (d), is two ahead. When the information (here, "4") is passed, it develops into SP reach A production. Further, in the case of the discomfort effect D, the state in which the medium variation display area is variablely displayed at a low speed as shown in FIG. 99 (d) is continued as shown in FIGS. 100 (i) to 100 (l) to achieve the SP reach A effect. Does not develop.

In this way, it is possible to infer that the player is a big hit because a sense of incongruity arises due to the difference in the timing of development to the SP reach A production. In addition, it is possible to visually know that the transition timing to the SP reach A effect is off and different from the normal effect and the big hit normal effect depending on the value of the identification information passing in the medium fluctuation display area. It is easy to understand. That is, the transition timing to the second predetermined effect in the first effect (outlier normal effect and jackpot normal effect) and the transition timing to the second predetermined effect in the second effect (here, discomfort effects B and C) are The display position in the variable display area for variable display of the same identification information as the temporarily stopped identification information is different. Of course, the same identification information as the identification information temporarily stopped by the transition timing to the second predetermined effect in the first effect and the transition timing to the second predetermined effect in the second effect so as to be difficult to visually discriminate. The display position in the variable display area for variable display may be the same.

After performing the SP reach A effect as shown in FIG. 99 (e) for a predetermined time, in the case of the off-normal effect, the variation display is stopped as shown in FIG. 99 (f). In the case of the jackpot normal effect, the SP reach A effect continues longer than the off-normal effect, and the variable display is stopped in the special result mode as shown in FIG. 99 (g).

Further, in the case of the discomfort effect A, the SP reach A effect continues longer than the jackpot normal effect as shown in FIG. 99 (h), and the variation display is stopped in the special result mode as shown in FIG. 99 (i). .. In the case of the discomfort effect B shown in FIGS. 100 (a) to 100 (d) and the discomfort effect C shown in FIGS. 100 (e) to 100 (h), the SP reach A effect is higher than the jackpot normal effect as in the discomfort effect A. Continues for a long time and the variable display stops in a special result mode. Further, also in the case of the discomfort effect D shown in FIGS. 100 (i) to 100 (m), the variation display is stopped in the special result mode after a longer variation time than the jackpot normal effect. In this way, the discomfort effects A to D are different from the normal production and the big hit normal production because the timing of transition to the SP reach A production and the timing of the fluctuation stop are different, which gives the player a sense of discomfort and implies that it is a big hit. can do.

In this modification, the selection probability of the jackpot normal effect is 10 times or more higher than the selection probability of the discomfort effects A to D, and in the case of a loss, the missed normal effect is selected with a predetermined probability. In this way, the chances of the discomfort effects A to D being executed are reduced by the fact that the selection probabilities of the discomfort effects A to D are different from the selection probabilities of the discomfort effects A to D and the normal effects and the jackpot normal selection probabilities are sufficiently large. You will be able to give a sense of discomfort.

Discomfort with respect to the probability that the off-normal effect and the jackpot normal effect are selected If the selection probabilities of the effects A to D differ by at least twice or more, there will be a difference in the selection opportunity, so that an effect of giving a discomfort will occur. On the contrary, if there is a difference of 30 times or more, the effect of giving a sense of discomfort is enhanced, but the chances of selecting the discomfort effects A to D are extremely reduced. Therefore, it is most effective that there is a difference of about 10 to 30 times. Of course, the effect is produced even if there is a difference of 2 to 10 times or 30 times or more.

Although SP1 reach A has been described in the above example, SP1 reach B may also include a plurality of types of patterns. Further, SP2 reach and SP3 reach also have A and B, and a plurality of types of patterns may be included in these. Further, the N reach may also include a plurality of types of patterns in the same manner.

Further, when the result is a big hit, the big hit normal effect or the discomfort effect A to D can be selected, but there is a variation time between the case where the big hit normal effect is executed and the case where the discomfort effect A to D is executed. Since there is a difference, it can be said that the game control device 100 selects whether to perform the jackpot normal effect or the discomfort effect A to D. Which of the discomfort effects A to D is selected can be executed only by the effect control device 300. Of course, the fluctuation times of the jackpot normal effect and the discomfort effects A to D may be the same fluctuation time, and in this way, the effect control device 300 alone can arbitrarily select from the jackpot normal effect and the discomfort effects A to D. Is possible, and the degree of freedom of choice can be increased.

That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means capable of executing the effect in relation to the game, and executes the first effect (outside normal effect and jackpot normal effect) and the second effect (discomfort effects A to D). Make a possible production execution means. Further, the game control device 100 or the effect control device 300 serves as an effect selection means capable of selecting the first effect or the second effect. Depending on the setting of the fluctuation time of the jackpot normal effect and the discomfort effect A to D, it is possible to configure the effect selection means only with the effect control device 300.

Further, although it is said that a discomfort is caused by changing the transition timing to the SP reach A production that performs the second predetermined effect, a discomfort may be caused by a difference in the transition timing to the other production. For example, a sense of incongruity may be caused by making the transition timing to the first predetermined effect different for each effect pattern. Further, when shifting from the second predetermined effect to the third predetermined effect, the shift timing may be different to cause a sense of discomfort. That is, as the same effect content, in a plurality of effect patterns in which a plurality of effects are transferred in a predetermined order, one or a plurality of transfer timings may be different to cause a sense of discomfort.

In addition, although the transition timing is set to be different based on the start timing of the game, a reference time is set to be set at an arbitrary timing (a timing that is not common to each production pattern) in the game that is not limited to the variable start. It is also possible to make a difference in the transition timing of the effect as seen from the reference time. In this reference time, it may be possible to indicate to the player that it is the reference time by performing a specific effect, and to make it easier for the player to grasp the difference in the transition timing of the effect as seen from the reference time.

FIGS. 101 and 102 show another example of the discomfort effect. FIG. 101 shows an execution mode and a selection ratio for SP1 reach A among SP1 reach. In this example, there are an out-of-order normal effect, a big hit normal effect, a discomfort effect A, a discomfort effect B, and a discomfort effect C, which are selected at a predetermined ratio. As shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the result is out of order, only the out-of-order normal effect is selected. Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the result is a big hit, it is selected from the effects other than the off-normal effect.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a), the off-normal effect develops into an N reach effect when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the special figure variation display game, and further develops into an SP reach A effect when a predetermined time elapses. After that, the fluctuation display stops due to the disconnection result. On the other hand, the jackpot normal effect and the discomfort effect A to C are designed to derive the result of the jackpot after executing the effect content common to the normal effect, and the effect of deriving the result of the jackpot. The time it takes to stop fluctuating is longer than that of the normal production.

In the first execution period, which is the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the N reach effect, the effect in which the character A appears can be executed. In the out-of-order normal effect and the jackpot normal effect, the character A appears as a specific effect at a predetermined timing when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, whereas in the discomfort effect A, the specific effect is performed earlier than this predetermined timing. Character A appears as a specific effect, and character A appears as a specific effect at a timing later than this predetermined timing in the discomfort effect B. In addition, the character A does not appear in the discomfort effect C. That is, the specific effect is not executed.

The out-of-order normal effect and the jackpot normal effect are selected with the highest probability when SP reach A is selected. By repeatedly executing these out-of-order normal effects and jackpot normal effects, a routine state is formed that strongly impresses that the effects that are commonly executed in the out-of-order normal effects and the jackpot normal effects are SP reach A effects. can do. In particular, by strongly impressing the timing when the character A appears as a specific effect, the routine state that is impressed when the discomfort effects A to C, which are selected with a lower probability than the deviant normal effect and the jackpot normal effect, is selected. It is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the above, and this discomfort state can imply a big hit.

Since the out-of-order normal effect and the jackpot normal effect are the same effect except that the timing of the variable stop is different, the player does not know the result until just before the timing of the variable stop. On the other hand, in the discomfort effects A to C, the time at which the difference from the normal effect can be felt earlier than the jackpot normal effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to infer that the player feels uncomfortable and becomes a big hit. Further, since the discomfort effects A to C differ only in the timing of the production in which the character A forming the specific effect appears and the other production contents are the same, it is assumed that the player feels discomfort in the first execution period. However, it is difficult to be sure that the production is uncomfortable, and the interest in the production is that it may be a big hit, so the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 102 shows an example of the display on the display device 41 in each pattern of SP reach A. FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (e) show an example of the display in the out-of-order normal effect and the big hit normal effect. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), when a new first start memory is generated while the first special figure change display game, which is the main change in the normal game state ST1, is not executed, the special figure 1 change display game starts. Then, the variable display is started on the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a.

In the out-of-order normal effect and the jackpot normal effect, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation of the first special figure variation display game, an effect imitating a shooting star is performed as shown in FIG. 102 (b), and then an effect imitating a shooting star is performed, and then FIG. 102 (c) As shown in, a specific effect in which a character A imitating a star appears is performed. Then, after the specific effect in which the character A appears as shown in FIG. 102 (d) is completed, the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area as shown in FIG. 102 (a). It becomes a state and becomes N reach production. After that, it develops into SP reach effect A, and the resulting aspect is derived.

FIGS. 102 (f) to 102 (j) show an example of the display in the discomfort effect A. As shown in FIG. 102 (f), when a new first start memory is generated while the first special figure variation display game, which is the main variation in the normal game state ST1, is not executed, the special figure 1 variation display game starts. Then, the variable display is started on the first decoration special figure 1 game display unit 85a.

In the discomfort effect A, the character A appears as shown in FIG. 102 (g) at the timing when the effect imitating a shooting star as shown in FIG. 102 (b) is performed in the out-of-order normal effect and the jackpot normal effect. Will be. Therefore, the effect of imitating a shooting star as shown in FIG. 102 (b) is not performed. As described above, the timing of the specific effect in which the character A appears is early, and the effect imitating a shooting star is not executed, so that the player feels uncomfortable. Further, as shown in FIGS. 102 (h) to 102 (j), after the specific effect in which the character A appears is completed, the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, and the reach state is reached. It feels strange because it takes a long time to produce.

Although the description of the discomfort effect B is omitted, the effect is not performed at the timing when the effect imitating the shooting star as shown in FIG. 102 (b) is performed in the off-normal effect and the jackpot normal effect, and the effect is shown in FIG. 102 (c). As shown, an effect imitating a shooting star is performed at the timing when the specific effect in which the character A appears is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (d), the specific effect in which the character A appears is performed at the timing when the specific effect in which the character A appears in the off-normal effect and the jackpot normal effect is completed. In this way, the delay in the start of the specific production makes us feel uncomfortable. In addition, the short time from the end of the effect in which the character A appears to the reach state also causes a sense of discomfort.

In the discomfort effect C, as shown in FIG. 102 (l), a shooting star-like effect is performed at the same timing as the off-normal effect and the jackpot normal effect. However, the reach state is reached without performing the specific effect in which the character A appears after that. Since the effect that the character A appears is not performed in this way, the player feels uncomfortable.

In this example, the period from the start of fluctuation to the N reach state is set to cause a sense of discomfort, but other periods may be targeted. Further, it may be combined with the examples shown in FIGS. 98 to 100.

In addition, the execution timing of the effect in which the character A that makes a specific effect appears is made different based on the start timing of the game, but it is common in the common effect that is commonly executed from the start of the fluctuation to the N reach effect. It can be said that the execution timing of the specific effect is different based on the start of the effect. Therefore, a predetermined common effect is executed at an arbitrary timing in the game not limited to the fluctuation start (a timing that is not common to each effect pattern), and the timing of executing the specific effect among the common effects is set. It is possible to cause a sense of discomfort by being different. In this case, it is possible to cause a sense of discomfort depending on the interval from the start of the common effect to the start of the specific effect or the interval from the end of the specific effect to the end of the common effect.

Further, the difference in the effect for forming the discomfort state is not limited to the execution timing as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 103, the difference may be such that the star-shaped character A having six angles is replaced with the star-shaped character B having seven angles, which is difficult for the player to find. .. Further, a discomfort state may be formed by using a difference in execution timing between the voice, the display, and the LED, such as a difference in the synchronization timing of the voice, the display, or the LED. Further, the discomfort state may be formed by using the difference in the color of the display or the LED, the reproduction speed of the sound, the pitch, and the like.

Further, in this modification, although the effect of giving a sense of discomfort between one game and another game has been described, the sense of discomfort may be given in one game. For example, in the decoration special figure variation display game in the middle of the special figure variation display game, the unit variation display that temporarily stops after displaying a plurality of identification information variable for a predetermined time is performed two or more times to derive the result mode. When performing the continuous variation display mode, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort between the effects selected in each unit variation display. In this case, the first effect or the second effect can be executed in the unit variation display, and the selection probability of the first effect is made higher than the selection probability of the second effect (for example, 10 times or more). The first effect and the second effect execute the same effect content, but the execution timing of the effect is different. Then, by making it possible to select the second effect only when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, it is possible to imply the occurrence of the big hit due to the discomfort caused by the execution of the second effect.

In addition, it is possible to imply that the jackpot is a big hit and the type of jackpot by making the selectable discomfort effect different depending on the type of the special result derived, or making the selection probability of each discomfort effect different. You may do so. Further, based on the information of RTC338, the discomfort effect that can be selected may be different depending on the date and time, or the selection probability of each discomfort effect may be different. In addition, the appearance of the effect may be stored and displayed as game history information, and the history information may be used to confirm that the effect was uncomfortable.

In addition, by operating the operating means provided in the game machine, the probability of deriving the special result can be selected and set from a plurality of types of probability setting values, and if the discomfort effect that can be selected differs depending on the set probability setting value. It may be possible to imply that it is a big hit and imply a probability set value by making it or by making the selection probability of each discomfort effect different.

In addition, an auxiliary display may be provided so that the player can easily grasp that the effect is a sense of incongruity. In the above example, the value of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area also functions as an auxiliary display, but an auxiliary display different from this may be performed. For example, a timer that displays the time may be displayed so that the timing of development to the SP reach A effect can be confirmed by the timer display. The value of the timer display may be an addition display of the elapsed time from a certain reference point such as the start of fluctuation, or a subtraction display of the remaining time to a certain reference point.

In addition, although the discomfort effect is performed as the effect of the special figure variation display game being executed, the discomfort effect may be performed by other effects. For example, in the look-ahead effect for notifying the pre-judgment result of the start memory, a strange feeling effect is performed in which the start memory with high expectation such as the start memory that becomes a big hit and the start memory that becomes the SP reach is made a look-ahead effect different from usual. You may do so. As a discomfort effect in the look-ahead effect, a display that is selected with a very low probability is provided in the display of the decorative special figure start memory display of the first memory display unit 83a, or is selected with a very low probability as a process of change. I try to provide a process to be done.

From the above, in the gaming machine provided with the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the effect in relation to the game, the effect control means is the first predetermined effect (SP reach A) in the first execution period. The first effect (outside normal effect and jackpot normal effect) and the second effect (discomfort effects A to D) can be executed, and the first effect or the second effect. The effect selection means (effect control device 300) capable of selecting the effect is provided, and the effect selection means has a first ratio when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is out of order. (See FIG. 98 (b)), the first effect can be selected to be executed, and the second ratio when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit. The first effect is executed at (execution ratio of the jackpot normal effect of FIG. 98 (c)) or the second effect is executed at the third ratio (execution ratio of the discomfort effects A to D of FIG. 98 (c)). When the first predetermined effect is executed, the effect executing means repeatedly executes the first effect during the first execution period to form a routine state, and the result of the game. When the first predetermined effect is executed when a hit occurs, by executing the second effect during the first execution period, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state. ..

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area is based on the fact that the game ball wins a prize in the start port provided in the game area (starting prize). ) Is variablely displayed. If a variable display game is started and a plurality of identification information modes stopped after a predetermined time is a predetermined special result mode, a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Some are in a gaming state (for example, JP-A-2017-121302). In such a conventional game machine, there is a problem that the production becomes monotonous by playing the game for a long time, and the interest of the game is not enhanced. According to the above invention, it is possible to perform a variety of unprecedented effects such as being able to suggest the result by deviating from the routine state formed by playing the game for a certain period of time, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. Can be done.

In addition, when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is out of order, the effect executing means repeatedly executes the first effect during the first execution period to form a routine state. When the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, by executing the second effect during the first execution period, it is possible to form a discomfort state deviating from the routine state. Will be.

Further, when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, the effect executing means repeatedly executes the first effect during the first execution period to form a routine state. When the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, by executing the second effect during the first execution period, it is possible to form a discomfort state deviating from the routine state. Will be.

Further, when the effect executing means repeatedly executes the first effect during the first execution period to form a routine state when the first predetermined effect is executed, and the result of the game is a hit. When the first predetermined effect is executed, the first predetermined effect is executed in the first execution period, and the first predetermined effect is continued in the second execution period following the first execution period. By executing this, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state.

In addition, when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is out of order, the effect executing means repeatedly executes the first effect during the first execution period to form a routine state. When the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, the first predetermined effect is executed in the first execution period, and in the second execution period following the first execution period. By continuously executing the first predetermined effect, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state.

Further, when the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, the effect executing means repeatedly executes the first effect during the first execution period to form a routine state. When the first predetermined effect is executed when the result of the game is a hit, the first predetermined effect is executed in the first execution period, and in the second execution period following the first execution period. By continuously executing the first predetermined effect, it is possible to form a discomfort state that deviates from the routine state.

Further, a game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the game ball is awarded to the start winning opening (first starting port 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting port 97) provided in the game area 32. A production control means (effect control device) capable of executing a production related to a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the above and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. 300), the effect control means can select and execute one effect pattern from a plurality of effect patterns for executing a specific effect as the same effect content, and the effect control means can be used for the plurality of effect patterns. There are a first effect and one or a plurality of second effects whose execution timings of the specific effect are different from those of the first effect, and the selection of the first effect when the result of the game is the special result. This means that the probability is higher than the selection probability of the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and enhance the interest of the game. The specific effect may be a transitional effect such as the SP reach A effect shown in FIG. 98, or an effect in which a specific character appears as shown in FIG. 101.

Further, the effect control means selects only the first effect when the result of the game does not result in the special result, and when the result of the game results in the special result, the first effect or the second effect. This means that the effect is selected so that the player feels uncomfortable when the second effect is executed.

Further, the effect control means is set so that the start timing of the specific effect with respect to the start timing of the game is different between the first effect and the second effect. Therefore, the player can grasp that it is the second effect by observing the execution timing of the specific effect based on the start timing of the game.

Further, the effect control means is configured to execute the specific effect during execution of the common effect that is commonly executed by the first effect and the second effect, and the specific effect with respect to the start timing of the common effect. The start timing of is different between the first effect and the second effect. Therefore, the player can grasp that it is the second effect by observing the execution timing of the specific effect based on the start timing of the common effect. The start timing of the common effect does not necessarily have to be a fixed timing from the start timing of the game.

Further, a game area 32 through which the game ball can flow down is provided, and the game ball is awarded to the start winning opening (first starting port 36, normal variable winning device 37, second starting port 97) provided in the game area 32. A production control means (effect control device) capable of executing a production related to a game in a game machine that executes a game based on the above and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. 300), the effect control means has a plurality of effect patterns for sequentially executing a first predetermined effect and a second predetermined effect started after the first predetermined effect as the same effect content. It is possible to select and execute one effect pattern from the above, and one or a plurality of the first effect and the transition timing to the second predetermined effect are different from the first effect for the plurality of effect patterns. There is a second effect, and the selection probability of the first effect when the result of the game is the special result is made higher than the selection probability of the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means includes a display device 41 capable of displaying a variable display game that is controlled by the effect control means and can display a plurality of identification information in a plurality of variable display areas in a variable manner corresponding to the game. At the transition timing to the second predetermined effect, the identification information is temporarily stopped in a part of the variable display area, and the identification information is variable-displayed in a discriminating state in the remaining variable display area. Then, in the transition timing to the second predetermined effect in the first effect and the transition timing to the second predetermined effect in the second effect, the variation display of the same identification information as the temporarily stopped identification information is displayed. This means that the display positions in the variable display area are different. Therefore, the player can grasp that it is the second effect based on the positional relationship of the identification information.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machine of this modified example has a different transition of the game state.

In the game machine of this modified example, the fall lottery is not performed. That is, the fall lottery process (step Y239) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 41 and the fall lottery process (step Y259) in the special figure 2 change start process shown in FIG. 42 are not performed. Therefore, in the case of a high probability state, the high probability state is continued until the next derivation of the first special result. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 104, the transition of the gaming state by winning the fall lottery is not set, and the fifth specific gaming state ST6 is not set either.

Further, in this modified example, the third specific game state ST4 is not set, and the first specific game state ST2 stays until the start of the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit (first special result). Based on the start of the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit in the first specific game state ST2, the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5. Then, when the probability variation jackpot is derived in the fourth specific gaming state ST5, the process shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the special gaming state, and when the normal jackpot is derived, the second specific gaming state is after the special gaming state. It is designed to move to ST3.

The fluctuation pattern selected by the gaming machine of this modified example is basically the fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 27 and 28. However, the variation pattern of FIG. 28 (b) can be selected only in the second specific game state ST3, and the variation pattern of FIG. 28 (c) can be selected only in the first specific game state ST2. As a result, a very long fluctuation time is set when the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is a big hit in the first specific game state ST2 is set, and a sufficient time after shifting to the fourth specific game state ST5. It is possible to secure a prize ball by a small hit (second special result) of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In this way, by not performing the fall lottery, it is possible to prevent the transition to the low probability state (shift to the fifth specific gaming state ST6) in the fourth specific gaming state ST5. That is, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the next jackpot is guaranteed. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game that generates the next big hit is started, the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5, so that the profit is guaranteed due to the frequent occurrence of small hits during the period until the big hit is derived. Will be done.

As a result, if the probabilistic jackpot is derived, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the special gaming state based on the probabilistic jackpot, and the number of prize balls that can be obtained due to the frequent occurrence of small hits in the subsequent fourth specific gaming state ST5. It is confirmed that the profit can be obtained by combining the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the special game state based on the next big hit, and the state can be made extremely interesting. In particular, if a series of effects are executed or the number of prize balls acquired is notified for the period from the start of the fourth specific game state ST5 to the end of the subsequent special game state, the above The period can be shown as an integrated advantageous state in which the number of prize balls that cannot be obtained only in the special game state is given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, as one of the conditions for shifting to the fourth specific game state ST5, even if the special figure variation display game is executed a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) in the first specific game state ST2, a fall lottery is performed. It was necessary to shift to the third specific game state ST4 without winning. However, in this modified example, since the fall lottery is not performed and the first specific game state ST2 stays until the start of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a big hit, the fourth specific game state ST5 The condition for shifting to is relaxed, and it becomes possible to easily and surely obtain the profit in the fourth specific game state ST5.

Even when the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit is started in the second specific game state ST3, a long fluctuation time is set as in the case of the first specific game state ST2, and the fourth specific game state is set. You may move to ST5. Further, in the first modified example, the selection of the variable time of the special figure variation display game, which is a big hit, is made different depending on the staying period of the third specific game state, but this is applied to this modified example and the first specific game is applied. The selection of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game, which is a big hit, may be different depending on the period of stay in the state ST2.

In addition, the first specific effect as shown in the second modification is performed when the special figure variation display game that becomes a big hit in the first specific game state ST2 is started, and the game shifts to the fourth specific game state ST5. You may try to produce. Further, when the special figure variation display game that does not become a big hit is started in the first specific game state ST2, the first specific effect may be performed as a ghost effect.

From the above, the game is provided based on the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, and the result of the game is a special result. In the case of a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player, a game control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, a closed state that serves as a start winning opening and the game ball cannot be won. A normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into an open state in which a game ball can be easily won and a right to execute a game can be generated by winning, and the game control means is an operating state of the normal variable winning device 37. Is controlled in either the first operating state (normal operating state) or the second operating state (time saving operating state), which is easier to win than the first operating state, and the normal variable winning device 37 When the operating state of is the second operating state, it is possible to change to the first operating state based on the start of the game having a special result. Therefore, since the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is changed at a timing not found in the past, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a game is provided with a second starting winning opening 97, which is a starting winning opening arranged on the downstream side of the ordinary variable winning device 37 and at a position where winning can be performed via a route that allows the ordinary variable winning device 37 to win a prize. The control means executes the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. The second game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed, and the first game and the second game can be executed at the same time, and the special result is that the first game and the second game have the same derivation probability. The first special result in which the derivation probability is set to either the low probability state or the high probability state higher than the low probability state, and the same derivation probability in both the low probability state and the high probability state. The first game, which is the first special result, is started when at least the second special result that can be derived in the second game is included and the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is the second operating state. Based on this, it is possible to change to the first operating state, and when the result of the second game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first game and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is executed, the special gaming state is executed. It is configured to interrupt the first game during the execution of the special game state.

Therefore, the change to the first operating state enables the inflow to the second start winning opening 97 on the downstream side, and the special figure variation display that is mainly executed with the start of the special figure 1 variation display game that becomes a big hit. The game will be switched to the special figure 2 variable display game, and it will be possible to give a new game property that has never existed in the past, and to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the special figure 2 variable display game can generate a small hit, it is possible to acquire a prize ball by the small hit during the period until the big hit occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the game control means sets the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 from the second operating state to the first operating state as the first operating state as the variable time for the first game, which is the first special result. It is possible to set a fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the first game without changing to. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game executed in parallel.

[6th modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different parts will be described. explain. The game machines of this modified example differ in the execution mode of the effect.

In the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability of the first special result can be changed by operating the gaming machine. The game control device 100 is provided with a setting key operation unit and a setting value change button as an operation unit for selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value is assigned from a plurality. By opening the front frame 12 and operating these operation units, it is possible to change the probability value that gives the first special result.

The game control device 100 is provided with a setting key switch that detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that forms the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the on state when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a set value change switch for detecting the operation of the set value change button forming the second operation unit of the operation units. The setting value change button is a push-type button, and the setting value change switch is turned on when the setting value changing button is pressed, and turned off when the setting value changing button is not pressed.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, 1/280 for setting 5, and setting 6 for setting 6. It is said to be 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and then the power of the game machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value change state. The selected probability set value is displayed on the probability set value display device provided in the game control device 100.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is pressed. When it is turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device, but the probability setting value cannot be changed in the probability setting value confirmation mode.

The probability set value display device is a 7-segment type display, and the probability set value is displayed by a number of 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like. Further, even if the probability set value display device is not provided, the probability set value information is displayed by using the state display device provided for displaying the base value and the accessory ratio calculated by the game control device 100. good. In this case, the information of the probability setting value is displayed while the operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), and other than that, the calculated base value and accessory ratio are displayed. Give priority to display.

In this modification, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device, and the like, and the probability value used by the game control device 100 for the lottery of the special figure variation display game is It serves as a setting means that allows the assigned probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signal of the setting value change switch or the setting key switch may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability setting value in the game control device 100, or the setting value may be changed on the setting sub-board side. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the change switch or the setting key switch, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

The information of the probability set value set by the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 can execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability set value based on this information. The effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value may be any, it may be the one suggesting or notifying the probability set value itself, and the probability set value is 3 or less or 4 or more. It may suggest or inform a range indicating that there is. Further, it may be executed as a part of the production of the special figure variation display game, or may be executed independently of the special figure variation display game. Further, the probability set value may be suggested or notified by an effect that causes a sense of discomfort as shown in the fourth modification. For example, an effect that causes a sense of discomfort when the probability set value is 5 or 6 is executed. It is possible, or the effect that causes a sense of discomfort that can be executed differs depending on the probability setting value.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present modification, a limiting period is provided to limit the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value depending on the execution mode of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 105 shows an example of a case where a limited period is set in the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. The display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and can execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability set value as one of the effects of this decorative special figure variable display game. ing.

As shown in FIG. 105, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is an irregular fluctuation, is started while the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed in the normal game state ST1 (t152). The special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state ST1 has a long variable time (t152 to t156), and is executed over a period in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed a plurality of times.

In this way, the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value is restricted by setting the period during which the special figure variation display game, which is an irregular variation, is executed as the limiting period. As a result, it is possible to give a penalty to a player who plays a game that does not follow the game method designed by the game machine, and to encourage the player not to play such a game.

As a condition for starting the limited period, there is the start of a special figure fluctuation display game (t152), which is an irregular fluctuation. In addition, as another start condition, after the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation is started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes the main fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes the main fluctuation changes. It may be stopped (t153), or the stop time of the special figure variation display game that is the main variation may end and the special figure variation display game may end (t154), or the next main variation It may be the start (t154) of the special figure variation display game.

In addition, the end condition of the restriction period includes the fluctuation stop (t156) of the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation and the end of the special figure fluctuation display game (t157) at which the stop display time ends. In addition, as another end condition, if the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation stops or ends during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes the main fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation that becomes the main fluctuation is concerned. It may be the start of the display game (t155), the change stop (t158) of the special figure change display game which is the main fluctuation, or the end (t159) of the special figure change display game which is the main change. It may be good, or it may be the start (t159) of the special figure fluctuation display game which is the next main fluctuation.

In addition to this, as a condition for ending the limited period, the special figure variation display game which is the main variation may be executed a predetermined number of times after the start of the special figure variation display game which is an irregular variation. This predetermined number of times can be set arbitrarily, but it may be a number of times that is likely to end in a period shorter than the fluctuation time of the irregular fluctuation, or may end in a period longer than the fluctuation time of the irregular fluctuation. May be a high number of times. If the number of times is likely to end in a period shorter than the fluctuation time of the irregular fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the production from being restricted for a long period of time, and when the player is replaced, the previous player is irregular. It is possible to prevent a penalty from being applied to a new player by executing the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes a fluctuation.

In addition, as an end condition of the restriction period, there is no start memory of the main fluctuation when the special figure fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation is finished during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game which is the irregular fluctuation. That is, it may be assumed that the special figure fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation continuously, is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a penalty from being applied to a new player when the player is replaced.

Further, as a start condition of the limited period, a special figure variation display game in which an irregular variation is performed a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period may be started. This is because if multiple irregular fluctuations are executed in a short period of time, there is a possibility that the irregular fluctuations are intentionally executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent an immediate penalty if an irregular fluctuation is unintentionally executed.

Of course, the start and end conditions of the limited period may be other than the above-mentioned conditions, and a plurality of start and end conditions may be provided. Further, in the limited period, the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value may not be performed at all, or the execution frequency may be lower than in the case of not the limited period. In addition, the accuracy of the suggestion may be inferior to that in the case where the period is not limited.

Further, in the case of a limited period, a dedicated effect that does not suggest or notify the probability set value may be performed at the timing when the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value is performed if it is not the limited period. In this way, the player can be made aware that he / she has lost the opportunity of the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value by executing the dedicated effect. For example, normally, the probability setting value is suggested or notified by the content of a single picture as an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability setting value, and when the period is limited, the probability setting value is not suggested or notified as a dedicated effect. Display a single picture.

Further, in the predetermined period before and after the transition of the game state, the limited period may not be started even if there is an irregular fluctuation. In particular, when there is a change in the game state that accompanies a change in the launch direction of the game ball, or a change in the game state that accompanies a change in the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37, irregular fluctuations are unintentionally executed. There is, and it is possible to prevent the penalty from being imposed in such a case.

Further, the limited period may be set even when the special figure variation display game in which the irregular variation occurs in the gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1 is executed. Further, although it is said that the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value is restricted during the limited period, other effects may be restricted. For example, the appearance of a character suggesting a high possibility of a special result, a cut-in effect, or the like may be restricted. Further, the effect by sound or light emission may be limited. For example, the BGM may be stopped, or the volume or the brightness of the light emission may be limited to a certain value or less.

Further, the fluctuation pattern may be limited, such as limiting a specific SP reach effect. In this case, the variation pattern selected by the game control device 100 may be limited, or the effect for the variation pattern determined by the game control device 100 set by the effect control device 300 may be limited. Is also good.

In addition, for the start memory generated during the limited period, the so-called look-ahead effect that suggests or notifies the result of the pre-judgment by pre-determining information such as the result before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory is restricted. You may try to do it. In this case, the pre-determination of the start memory may be restricted, or the pre-determination may be performed but the look-ahead effect may be restricted. When limiting the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect for the start memory generated before the start of the limited period may also be limited. Further, when the prior determination is restricted, the look-ahead effect is restricted even after the end of the restriction period for the start memory generated during the restriction period. However, in this case, the preliminary judgment may be performed again after the end of the restriction period.

From the above, the game is provided based on the game area 32 in which the game ball can flow down, and the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, and the result of the game is a special result. In this case, in a game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player, a control means for controlling the game (game control device 100, effect control device 300) and a first start winning opening (first starting winning opening) forming a starting winning opening. A mouth 36, a normal variable winning device 37), and a second starting winning opening 97 forming a starting winning opening are provided, and the game control means is a first game as a game based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening. Is executed, the second game is executed as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening, the first game and the second game can be executed at the same time, and the first game and the first game are executed according to the game state. It is determined in advance whether to proceed with the game mainly in any of the two games, and when a game other than the main game is being executed, the execution mode of the game is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being played by a game method that is not planned by design, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

The control means is to set a limit on the execution of the production of the game when a non-main game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being played by a game method that is not planned by design, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

The control means includes a setting means that enables the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit, and a non-main game is being executed. In that case, the execution of the effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value is limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being played by a game method that is not planned by design, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

37 Ordinary variable winning device 100 Game control device (game control means)

Claims (1)

The game is provided with a game area in which the game ball can flow down, and the game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the player is notified. In a game machine that generates an advantageous state
A game control means that comprehensively controls the game,
With the ordinary variable winning device which has the starting winning opening and can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and can generate the execution right of the game by winning. ,
A second starting winning opening forming the starting winning opening, which is located on the downstream side of the ordinary variable winning device and at a position where a game ball that has passed through a path that can win the ordinary variable winning device can win a prize. Prepare,
The game control means
The first game is executed as the game based on the winning of the game ball to the ordinary variable winning device,
The second game is executed as the game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening.
The first game and the second game can be executed at the same time.
The special result is
A first special result in which the first game and the second game have the same derivation probability, and the derivation probability is set to either a low probability state or a high probability state higher than the low probability state. ,
A second special result, which has the same derivation probability in both the low probability state and the high probability state and can be derived in the second game, is included.
The game control means
The operating state of the normal variable winning device is controlled by either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state.
When the operating state of the normal variable winning device is the second operating state, it is possible to change to the first operating state based on the start of the first game that results in the first special result.
If the result of the second game becomes the second special result during the execution of the first game and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is executed, the first is being executed during the execution of the special gaming state. Configured to interrupt the game,
Change to the first operating state as the fluctuation time for the first game, which is the first special result in which the operating state of the normal variable winning device is changed from the second operating state to the first operating state. A game machine characterized in that a fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the first game can be set without the above .